Operator'S Manual: Ref - No. VOE21B1003320 English CST

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Ref.No. VOE21B1003320 English

CST
California
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth
defects, and other reproductive harm.
California
Proposition 65 Warning
Battery posts, terminals and other related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and other
reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
L110F/L120F
Foreword OPERATOR'S MANUAL
This Operator's Manual is intended as a guide for the correct
use and maintenance of the machine. Therefore, study it
carefully before starting and operating the machine, or before
carrying out any preventive maintenance.
Keep the manual in the cab so that it always is at hand. Re-
place it immediate if it is lost. Table of contents
The manual describes the applications for which the machine
primarily is intended and is written to apply for all markets. We
therefore ask you to disregard the sections which are not ap-
plicable to your machine or to the work for which you use your
machine.
Presentation
NOTE! The information in the manual applies to machine
models L110F and L120F, unless otherwise stated.
Many hours are spent on design and production to make a Instrument panels
machine that is as efficient and safe as possible. The acci-
dents which occur in spite of this, are mostly caused by the
human factor. A safety conscious person and a well main-
tained machine make a safe, efficient and profitable combina-
tion. Therefore, read the safety instructions and follow Other controls
them.
We continually strive to improve our products and to make
them more efficient through changes to their design. We re-
tain the right to do this without committing ourselves to intro-
duce these improvements on products, which have already Operating instructions
been delivered. We also retain the right to change data and
equipment, as well as instructions for service and other main-
tenance measures without prior notice.
Safety regulations Operating techniques

It is the operator's obligation to know and follow the applica-
ble national and local safety regulations. The safety instruc-
tions in this manual only apply to cases when there are no
national or local regulations. Safety when servicing
WARNING! Service and maintenance

The symbol above appears at various points in the
manual together with a warning text. It means:
Warning, be alert! Your safety is involved! It is the obli-
gation of the operator to make sure that all warning
decals are in place on the machine and that they are Specifications
readable. Accidents may otherwise occur.
Get to know the capacity and limits of your Alphabetical index

machine!
Ref.nr VOE21B1003320
2009.12
The original languages are Swedish and English. Original instructions.
Copyright © 2009, Volvo Construction Equipment Customer Support. With sole rights.
Foreword
2 Identification numbers
Identification numbers
State the identification number of the machine and the components below. The number should be stated when
contacting the manufacturer and when ordering spare parts. The position of the plates is shown on page 15.
Manufacturer Volvo Construction Equipment AB

SE-631 85 Eskilstuna
Sweden
Machine product identifi-

cation number (PIN)
Engine
Transmission
Front axle
Rear axle
Lifting frame
Cab
Please send any comments regarding the Operator´s Manual to om@volvo.com

Table of contents
3
Table of contents
Foreword....................................................................1
Identification numbers ............................................................ 2
Presentation ..............................................................5
CE-marking, EMC-directive .................................................. 11
Communication equipment, installation................................ 14
Product plates....................................................................... 15
Information and warning plates / decals ............................... 16
The USA Federal Clean Air Act............................................ 20
Instrument panels ...................................................23
Instrument panel, front.......................................................... 24
Display.................................................................................. 29
Instrument panel, cab post ................................................... 56
Instrument panel, overhead.................................................. 65
Rear cab wall........................................................................ 66
Control panel (optional equipment) ...................................... 67
Other controls .........................................................69
Controls ................................................................................ 69
Operator comfort .................................................................. 83
Operating instructions ...........................................93
Visibility................................................................................. 94
Safety rules when operating ................................................. 96
Actions before operating..................................................... 100
Starting engine ................................................................... 101
Gear shifting ....................................................................... 103
Steering .............................................................................. 107
Braking ............................................................................... 109
Stopping machine............................................................... 111
Parking ............................................................................... 112
What to do if the machine gets stuck.................................. 113
Recovering/towing .............................................................. 114
Transporting machine......................................................... 117
Operating techniques ...........................................125
Economical operation ......................................................... 125
Whole-body vibrations ........................................................ 126
Working within dangerous areas ........................................ 128
Attachments........................................................................ 132
Attachment brackets........................................................... 133
Hydraulic function, 3rd and 4th........................................... 135
Buckets............................................................................... 136
Log grapples (optional equipment) ..................................... 142
High-Lift grapple (optional equipment) ............................... 145
Pallet forks (optional equipment) ........................................ 146
Material handling arm (optional equipment) ....................... 150
Rotating attachments.......................................................... 153
Lifting objects...................................................................... 154
Signalling diagram .............................................................. 156
Safety when servicing ..........................................159
Service position .................................................................. 159
Before service read ............................................................ 160
Fire protection..................................................................... 162
Handling hazardous materials ............................................ 164
Table of contents
4
Service and maintenance.....................................169

Service points ..................................................................... 172
Engine ................................................................................ 173
Fuel system ........................................................................ 175
Engine air cleaner............................................................... 179
Oil-bath air cleaner (optional equipment) ........................... 180
Cooling system ................................................................... 181
Electrical system................................................................. 184
Transmission ...................................................................... 189
Axles................................................................................... 191
Brake system...................................................................... 193
Tyres................................................................................... 194
Cab ..................................................................................... 195
Air conditioning ................................................................... 197
Bucket teeth........................................................................ 199
Hydraulic system ................................................................ 200
Lubrication .......................................................................... 203
Automatic greasing system ................................................ 204
Lubrication and service chart.............................................. 209
Lubrication and service chart.............................................. 210
Specifications........................................................215
Recommended lubricants................................................... 215
Change volumes................................................................. 218
Interval between changes................................................... 219
Engine ................................................................................ 220
Electrical system................................................................. 222
Transmission ...................................................................... 227
Axles................................................................................... 228
Brake system...................................................................... 229
Steering system.................................................................. 230
Tyre sizes and air pressures .............................................. 231
Wheel nuts, tightening torques ........................................... 233
Cab ..................................................................................... 234
Hydraulic system ................................................................ 236
Dimensions......................................................................... 238
Machine, volumes............................................................... 240
Combination table, interchangeable equipment
(attachments) machine model ......................................... 242
Pallet forks.......................................................................... 243
Log grapples....................................................................... 245
Material handling arm ......................................................... 247
Service journal.................................................................... 249
Alphabetical index ................................................253
Presentation
5
Presentation
1026967
Intended use
The basic machine is intended to be used under normal condi-
tions, that is, outdoors, above ground, at an elevation up to 1,500
metres (4920 ft) above sea level, off-road, for earthmoving opera-
tions, at an ambient temperature between -25 °C (-13 °F) and +45
°C (113 °F). Conditions that deviate from this are also described in
the Operator's Manual. For use on public roads the machine must
be adapted according to governing national legislation.
If it is used for other purposes or in potentially dangerous environ-
ments, for example explosive atmosphere, flammable environ-
ment or areas with dust containing asbestos, etc., special safety
regulations must be followed and the machine be equipped for
such use. Contact the manufacturer/dealer for further information.
The exhaust system is certified as spark-arrester acc. to ATEX Di-
rective 94/9/EC, EN 1834-2.
The machine is designed for a maximum machine weight (incl.
equipment and attachments) of 23000 kg (50706 lb) for L110F and
24000 kg (52911 lb) for L120F. If the maximum weight is exceed-
ed, safety will be jeopardized. In addition, no warranties on the part
of the manufacturer will apply. However, always pay attention to
national regulations for travelling on public roads.
Environmental requirements
Bear the environment in mind when operating and during service
and maintenance of the machine. Always follow local and national
environmental legislation applicable to all handling of the machine.
Engine
Volvo D7 is a 7 litre (427 in3) engine. The engine is turbocharged
with intercooling of the air to air type. It has unit pumps (electronic
unit pumps, EUP). The unit pumps are positioned at an angle
above the pistons and are controlled via the camshaft and a con-
trol unit, E-ECU.
The fuel system is of the common rail type.
The cylinder head covers all cylinders.
The engine has two valves per cylinder.
The accelerator position is transferred electrically from accelerator
pedal and hand throttle control (optional equipment) to the control
unit (E-ECU).
Presentation
6
Electrical system
The machine has the following four control units (ECUs):
The I-ECU for the instrumentation is integrated with the display
unit, warning lamps and instruments and provides the operator
with information via these.
ECC (ECU for climate control system)
The V-ECU (for the machine) receives signals from sensors on the
machine and these are sent on to the I-ECU.
E-ECU (for engine control).
In addition to these four control units it is possible to obtain a V2-
ECU (for electric servo lever control). This is optional equipment.
Power transmission
The transmission is electro-hydraulically controlled, where all
gears are in constant mesh. The gear ranges are selected by the
application of different clutches. Between engine and transmission
there is a hydraulic torque converter, which steplessly controls the
output torque. Front and rear axles have planetary gears in the
wheel hubs, which reduce the strain on the respective drive shafts.
The axles are of the AWB type.
Brake system
The machine is provided with a dual-circuit all-hydraulic brake sys-
tem with one circuit for each axle. Each circuit meets the require-
ments for secondary brake capability. The brakes are cooled with
oil that circulates in the axle.
Parking brake
The parking brake is electro-hydraulically controlled with a switch
on the instrument panel. The parking brake is a wet multi-disc
brake built into the transmission. The brake is applied by spring
force and is released hydraulically.
Steering system
The machine is provided with a load-sensing, hydrostatic steering
system and has a steering arc of 40°.
Cab
The cab has a heating and ventilation system with defrosting for all
windows. Air conditioning is available as an option.
Emergency exit
The cab has two emergency exits, the door and the right side win-
dow.
Presentation
7
FOPS and ROPS

The cab is approved as protective cab according to FOPS and
ROPS standards, see page 234. FOPS is an abbreviation of Fall-
ing Object Protective Structure (overhead roof protection) and
ROPS is an abbreviation of Roll Over Protective Structure (rollover
protection).
If any part of the cab's protective structure is affected by plastic de-
formation or failures, the cab shall be replaced immediately.
Never carry out any unauthorised alterations to the cab, e.g. low-
ering the roof height, drilling, welding on brackets for fire extin-
guisher, radio aerial or other equipment, without first, via a dealer,
having discussed the alteration with personnel at the Volvo CE En-
gineering Department. This department will decide whether the al-
teration may cause the approval to become void. It is important
that all parties concerned are ware of these regulations.
Hydraulic system
The hydraulic system is load-sensing, which means that the oil in
the system is supplied in proportion to the position of the hydraulic
control levers. If the hydraulic control levers are in neutral position,
consequently no oil is supplied.
The hydraulic system is equipped with pumps in common for the
steering system and the working hydraulics. However, the steering
system has priority from one of the pumps. Normally brake charg-
ing takes place when steering and working hydraulics are used,
but when there is a greater demand, also the fan pump contrib-
utes.
Equipment
The machine can be provided with different types of optional
equipment, depending on the requirements of different markets.
Examples of such equipment are lever steering (CDC), Boom Sus-
pension System (BSS), secondary steering, separate attachment
locking, automatic engine shutoff, electric servo lever control (V2-
ECU) and automatic greasing (standard on certain markets).
Modifications
Modifications of the machine including using non-approved attach-
ments, accessories, and spare parts may impact the machine's
condition and the machine's ability to function as intended and de-
signed. No modifications of any type may be performed without pri-
or written approval from Volvo Construction Equipment. Volvo
Construction Equipment reserves the right to decline all warranty
claims which have arisen because of or can be traced to unauthor-
ised modifications.
Persons or organisation who carry out unauthorised modifications,
assume all responsibility for consequences, which arise because
of the modification or can be attributed to the modification, includ-
ing damaging affect on the machine.
Modifications may be considered to be officially approved, if at
least one of the following conditions has been met:
The attachment, the accessory, or the spare part has been
made or distributed by Volvo Construction Equipment och and
has been installed according to the approved method de-
scribed in a publication available from Volvo Construction
Equipment; or
The modification has been approved in writing by the Engineer-
ing Department of the relevant product line at Volvo Construc-
tion Equipment.
Presentation
8
Anti-theft device (optional equipment)

An installed anti-theft device makes it more difficult to steel the ma-
chine. Volvo CE can supply an anti-theft device as optional equip-
ment. If your machine is not equipped with such a device, look into
the possibility of having one installed by your dealer.
Logged machine data

The machine is equipped with a software system that registers and
stores different kinds of information. The information can be trans-
ferred to Volvo CE in order to be used for product development
purposes and for trouble-shooting. The stored information con-
tains among other items travelling speed, fuel consumption and
various temperatures. Volvo CE and their authorised workshops
will be making use of this information.
CareTrack (optional equipment)

The machine can be equipped with CareTrack, a telematics sys-
tem developed by Volvo Construction Equipment. The system
stores machine data, e.g., machine position, operating hours, fuel
consumption, fuel level, that can be sent by wireless transmission
to a computer. CareTrack is available in different versions, de-
pending on the required information level.
CareTrack makes it easier to plan for service and reduces costly
downtime. Productivity is improved by knowing if machines are be-
ing operated correctly and how much fuel is being consumed.
CareTrack also allows the customer to restrict the operating area
of the machine, by using virtual fences. This helps eliminate unau-
thorised machine usage and theft. For further information, contact
a Volvo Construction Equipment dealer.
Fire suppression system

(optional equipment)
The fire suppression system is a sprinkler system for the engine
compartment and features 13 sprinkler nozzles.
The system meets the standards according to SBF 127 (Swedish
rules for permanently installed sprinkler system and other fire pro-
tection equipment on forestry and construction machines).
A B 1044754
A Sprinkler circuit
B Detector circuit (parallel with A)
C Container with fire extinguishing agent
Presentation
9
Automatic mode.
In automatic mode only the green light-emitting diode is activated
(''On'') on the control panel, see page 67.
The sprinkler system is activated automatically in two modes:
when the machine is not operated (e.g., when parked) with the
engine off and also when the main electric power is off (battery
disconnector off), or
when the parking brake is applied with the engine running.
In case of high temperatures, a detector circuit detects fire and the
sprinkler system is activated automatically. After the system has
been activated, there is enough extinguishing agent for approx. 20
seconds of operation. Then the extinguishing agent container is
C empty.
B
Manual mode
In manual mode both the green light-emitting diode (''On'') and yel-
A low light-emitting diode (''Manual'') are activated, see page67.
The sprinkler system is in manual mode (the operator activates the
system) when the machine is operated and the parking brake is re-
leased.
1044230
When the machine is operated and fire is detected, an alarm is
generated via a red light on the control panel (A) and the siren/
Cab's front left pillar strobe light are activated, see page 10. Then the system should be
A Control panel activated manually with the emergency stop (C), see page 82, via
B Plastic cover the control panel, see page 67, or by pressing in the manual acti-
C Emergency stop (stops the engine, cuts vation button (located by cab steps), see below.
off electric power, and activates the For the control panel's functions, see page 67.
sprinkler system if fire is indicated)
NOTE! Plastic cover (B) shall only be raised when the control
panel is used. The safety seal is restored during service and
maintenance.
For safety rules in case of fire, see page 99.
A
B
Manual release (activation) button
The manual release (activation) button (located by cab steps) can
be used in all modes to activate the sprinkler system, even when
the machine is not operated and if the machine's electric power
supply is turned off.
1 Pull out the yellow safety seal (A).
2 Press in the red button (B).
1044757
A Safety seal
B Button to activate the fire suppression
system outside the cab (located by cab
steps)
1043942
Manual activation of the sprinkler system

with the manual release (activation) button
Presentation
10
Siren/strobe light
Siren/strobe light are activated
when fire is detected
when the sprinkler system is activated using the control panel
when the system is activated with manual release (activation)
button
1043937
when the test button on the control panel is pressed in.
Decal for siren (located by siren/strobe
light) Siren/strobe light remain activated until the test button on the con-
trol panel is pressed in. If there is still an indication of fire the siren/
strobe light are activated again, contact a workshop authorized by
Volvo CE.
Location for handheld fire extinguisher (optional

equipment)
There is space provided for two handheld fire extinguishers, one
on each front fender. These are a supplement to the permanently
installed sprinkler system and the main purpose is to protect the
surroundings as well as use for any needed continued suppres-
sion of the fire. According to standard SBF127, two fire extinguish-
ers of 6 kg (13.2 lb) each are required for work in fire-hazardous
conditions and environments.
To use the handheld fire extinguishers:
1 Hold the fire extinguisher upright, pull out and remove the safe-
1043938
ty pin.
Decal for handheld fire extinguisher (located
by each handheld fire extinguisher) 2 Point the nozzle at the base of the flames, from a distance of at
least 1 meter (3ft 3.4 in).
3 Press the trigger.
Fire extinguishing agent

The fire extinguishing agent is a water-based powder ("wet chem")
that is easy to wash off after the system has been activated.
At activation of the sprinkler system, there is enough fire extin-
guishing agent for approx. 20 seconds of operation.
The fire extinguishing agent is protected against freezing down to
-30 °C (-22 °F).
WARNING!
The fire extinguishing agent contains glycol which may
cause personal injury in case of contact. Avoid contact In
case of eye contact, rinse with water. In case of skin
contact, wash with soap and water. Always contact a doctor
after contact with the fire extinguishing agent.
1052584
After activation of the sprinkler system
Decal for fire extinguishing agent (located on After activation of the sprinkler system, contact a workshop author-
container for fire extinguishing agent) ized by Volvo CE.
Presentation
CE-marking, EMC-directive 11
CE-marking, EMC-directive
CE-Sign
(Declaration of Conformity)
(Applies only to machines marketed within the EU/EEA)
This machine is CE marked. This means that, when delivered to
the customer, the machine meets the applicable "Essential Health
and Safety Requirements" according to EU's so-called Machine
Safety Directive, 2006/42/EC.
Any person carrying out changes that affect the safety of the ma-
L64437A chine, is also responsible for the same.
As proof of that the requirements are met, an EU Declaration of
Conformity and a sound certificate regarding sound level in dB(A)
are supplied with the machine. The sound certificate includes both
measured external values and guaranteed sound level. These
declarations are issued by Volvo CE for each individual machine.
This EU declaration also covers attachments manufactured by Vol-
vo CE. The documentation is a valuable document, which should
be kept safe and retained for at least ten years. The document
should always accompany the machine when it is sold.
If the machine is used for other purposes or with other attachments
than described in this manual, safety must at all times and in each
separate case be maintained. A modification may in certain cases
require new CE-marking and issuing of a new EU declaration of
conformity. The person performing the modification is responsible
for this.
EMC Regulations of the EC

The electronic equipment of the machine may in some cases
cause interference to other electronic equipment, or suffer from ex-
ternal electromagnetic interference, which may constitute safety
risks.
The EU EMC directive about "Electromagnetic compatibility",
2004/108/EC, provides a general description of what demands
can be made on the machine out of a safety point of view, where
permitted limits have been determined and given according to in-
ternational standards.
A machine or device must meet the standards in order to be CE-
marked. Our machines have been tested particularly for electro-
magnetic interference. The CE marking of the machine and the
declaration of conformity also cover the EMC directive.
If other electronic equipment is fitted to this machine, the equip-
ment must be CE marked and tested on the machine with regard
to electromagnetic interference.
Declaration of Conformity
The next page shows a copy of the declaration of conformity for
machine and on page 13 shows a general copy of the declaration
of conformity for attachments in the category interchangeable
equipment (attachments that can be changed by operator).
NOTE! Declaration of conformity only applies within the Euro-
pean Union.
Presentation
12 CE-marking, EMC-directive
Valid for Volvo Wheel Loaders

This document is only applicable within the EU
EG DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FOR MACHINES (IIA)
Volvo Construction Equipment AB, SE-631 85 ESKILSTUNA, Sweden,

states that the product:
Type Wheel loader LYYYY
Product identification number (PIN): *VCELXXXXXXXXXXXXX*
for which this declaration is intended, meets the relevant regulations for
"Essential Health and Safety Requirements" according to:
European Council's directive 2006/42/EC for machines,
European Council's directive 2000/14/EC for noise emission to the envi-
ronment from outdoor equipment
European Council's directive 2004/108/EC for electromagnetic compati-
bility, as well as amendments of these for machines, and other applicable
directives.
Governing harmonised standards:

EN 474-1:2006+A1:2009 Earthmoving machines Safety general re-
quirements,
EN 474-3:2006+A1:2009 Earthmoving machines Requirements for
loaders.
This declaration only covers the machine in the condition in which it was
introduced on the market, and does not include components that have
been retrofitted or work after this which has been done by the end user
Authorised issuer's signature and person authorised to compile the tech-

nical file which has been established in the European Community:
.................................................................................................
Signature / Clarification of signature (print)
.................................................................................................
Occupation or title
.................................................................................................
Address and date of issue
Signature of authorised representative in the European Community with

authorisation to complete the manufacturing process and produce the
manufacturer's declaration of conformity (if applicable)
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
Occupation or title
.................................................................................................
This declaration covers attachments that have been developed, designed/

approved, marked, and marketed by the manufacturer mentioned above.
The machine owner must save this declaration for at least ten years
after delivery.
Presentation
CE-marking, EMC-directive 13
Valid for attachments in the category interchangeable equip-

ment (attachments that can be changed by operator) for Vol-
vo Wheel Loaders
This document is only applicable within the EU
EG DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FOR MACHINES (IIA)
Volvo Construction Equipment AB, SE-631 85 ESKILSTUNA, Sweden,

states that the product:
Model / Type number *): YYYYY
Serial number: XXXXXXXXXX
for which this declaration is intended, meets the relevant regulations for
"Essential Health and Safety Requirements" according to:
European Council's directive 2006/42/EC for machines and och supple-
ments for machines, and other applicable directives.
Governing harmonised standards:

EN 474-1:2006+A1:2009 Earthmoving machines Safety general re-
quirements,
EN 474-3:2006+A1:2009 Earthmoving machines Requirements for
loaders.
This declaration only covers the machine in the condition in which it was
introduced on the market, and does not include components that have
been retrofitted or work after this which has been done by the end user
Authorised issuer's signature and person authorised to compile the tech-

nical file which has been established in the European Community:
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
Occupation or title
.................................................................................................
Signature of authorised representative in the European Community with

authorisation to complete the manufacturing process and produce the
manufacturer's declaration of conformity (if applicable)
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
Occupation or title
.................................................................................................
The machine owner must save this declaration for at least ten years
after delivery.
*) On page 242 there is a combination table showing attachments

in the category interchangeable equipment (attachments that
can be changed by operator) and for which machines these attach-
ments are approved.
Presentation
14 Communication equipment, installation
Communication equipment,
installation
IMPORTANT! Every installation of optional communication
equipment must be performed by trained professionals
according to instructions issued by Volvo CE.
Protection against electromagnetic interference

This machine has been tested in accordance with EC directive
2004/108/EEC concerning electromagnetic interference. It is
therefore very important that all non-approved electronic accesso-
ries, such as communication equipment, are tested before they
are installed and used, as they can interfere with the electronic
system of the machine.
Guidelines for installing aerial (antenna)

The guide lines listed below must be followed during installation:
The position of the aerial should be chosen in such a way, that
it is well adapted to the environment.
The down lead from the aerial should be of coaxial cable type.
Make sure that the cable is undamaged, that the screen is not
split up at the ends, but thoroughly encased in the connector
and has good galvanic contact with the same.
The surface between the mounting bracket for the aerial and
the point of attachment must be free from dirt and oxide. Apply
corrosion protection to the surfaces after installation so that
good galvanic contact is maintained.
Take care to separate cables that may cause interference from
those which may suffer interference. Interfering cables are the
power supply cable and the aerial cable to the communication
equipment. Cables that may suffer from interference are con-
necting cables for the electronics of the machine. Install cable
harnesses as close to grounded plate surfaces as possible, as
these have a screening effect.
Presentation
Product plates 15
Product plates
With the aid of the product plates listed below, it is possible to identify the machine and its components. State
these numbers when ordering spare parts or when making enquiries.
3, 4,10 6
5
1 2
9
8
7 1031007
1 Lifting frame 6 Engine + exhaust decal

The manufacturer's name and address and the lifting The engine's type designation and component
frame CIN. number.
2 Primary marking 7 Front axle
The machine's PIN (stamped on the left side next to The manufacturer's name and address and front drive
the product plate). axle CIN.
3 Product plate 8 Transmission
The manufacturer's name and address, machine PIN. The manufacturer's name and address and the trans-
mission's component number.
4 Additional plate for product plate 9 Rear axle
Machine weight 1), engine output, year of manufac- The manufacturer's name and address and rear drive
ture, year of delivery and position of CE mark (EU/ axle's component number.
EEA countries only).
5 Cab 10 Supplementary exhaust decal
Manufacturer's name and address, product number, The engine's type designation and component
machine's model designation, max. machine weight2) number (easier to access than ordinary exhaust
(for which the cab is approved acc. to the ROPS-test), decal, which may be hidden)
cab serial number, ROPS/FOPS-number, and ROPS/
FOPS-certificate number.
1) For current machine weight, see page 240.

2) For the machine's max. machine weight, see page 5.
Presentation
16 Information and warning plates / decals
Information and warning plates / decals

The operator should know and pay attention to the information and warning plates / decals which are positioned
on the machine. All plates/decals are not installed on all machines, as they are market and machine dependent.
The decals/plates must be kept free from dirt, so that they can be read and understood. If they have disappeared
or are no longer legible, they must be replaced immediately. The part number (order number) is shown on the
respective decal /plate and in the parts catalogue.
NOTE! "WARNING" is written on the warning decals for North America.
9 27 26
29
13 15
11
22 19
24 2
6 21
16
20
7
3
21
10
24
5 21 8
1026954
28
17, 23 14 1, 30
18
12 4, 9
11
2 24
21
8 6
25
21
10 24
1030669
8 21 5
Presentation
Information and warning plates / decals 17
1040932
1052898
10548264 15048368
1 WARNING! First read the Operator's Manual 2 WARNING! Rotating fan

(Spare part number in USA: 13935003) (Spare part number in USA: 13935001)
1052892
15048422
1052896
15048239
4 WARNING! Check that the attachment is locked

3 WARNING! Reversing machine
(Spare part number in USA: 11111506)
1052897
15048526
15048335
5 WARNING! Risk of crushing at frame joint if machine is 6 WARNING! Do not walk under raised attachment
steered (Spare part number in USA: 11027566)
L67533A
1052901
15048515 4948092
8 Pressurised system
7 WARNING! Do not step on this surface
Presentation
18 Information and warning plates / decals
1052899
15048257
11445277
1024716
9 When travelling on a public road, it is prohibited to have 10 WARNING! Before connecting jump-start cables, read
the Comfort Drive Control (CDC) activated use the the Operator's Manual
steering wheel (Spare part number in USA: 13935004)
1053114
15048695
1026965
11 WARNING! Hot surfaces 12 Hot coolant

4952173
4948103
NOTICE: R134a AC-SYSTEM
System designed acc. to SAE J639 rev.nov91
Caution: System to be servised by Volvo qualified personel.

See Volvo service instruction.
L67526A
L67542A
L67541A
Volvo Construction Equipment 11104071
13 Hydraulic oil level 14 Refrigerant R134a 15 Hydraulic oil filling point
D
1026932
11445056
L67543A
11055037 1020820
16 Fuel filling point 17 Emergency exit 18 Use Volvo coolant VCS read the
Operator's Manual
Presentation
Information and warning plates / decals 19
11 026 730
L67530A
L68746A
L67525A
4952167
19 Air cleaner read the Operator's 20 Battery disconnect switch 21 Attaching point for lashing
Manual
L WA L pA
dB
495
4898
dB
L67551A 00000000 L67552A
22 Sound power level outside the ma- 23 Sound pressure level in cab
chine 24 Point for lifting
Volvo Construction Equipment 500 h

250 h
Volvo Construction Equipment AB 50 h

10 h
SE-631 85 ESKILSTUNA, SWEDEN

Coupling Forces 13
12 2
12
11
3
6
4
1026949
11445271
7 2
5
10 6
2 7
9 1 1 8
10 h
50 h
250 h
500 h
1030425
1000h 2000h 4000h 6000h
25 Maximum force on towing device 26 Lifting and lashing information 11431140
read the Operator's Manual

27 Lubrication and service chart
! WARNING
DISCONNECT STEERING
FRAME LOCK BEFORE
L68091A
MOVING MACHINE
L67575A
11130942
1027909
4952170
28 Transmission read the Opera- 29 WARNING! Disconnect the frame 15011966
tor's Manual joint lock before operating (only

USA) 30 WARNING! Electromagnetic
fields, EMF read the Operator's
Manual
Presentation
20 The USA Federal Clean Air Act
The USA Federal Clean Air Act

The Federal Clean Air Act Section 203.a (3) prohibits the removal
of air pollution control devices or the modification of an EPA-certi-
fied non-road engine to a non certified configuration.
The Federal regulations implementing the Clean Air Act for non-
road engines, 40 CFR 89.1003(a)(3)(i), reads as follows:
The following acts and the causing thereof are prohibited:

For a person to remove or render inoperative a device or element
of design installed on or in a non-road engine vehicle or equipment
in compliance with the regulations under this part prior to its sale
and delivery to the ultimate purchaser or for a person knowingly to
remove or render inoperative such a device or element of design
after the sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser.
The law provides a penalty of up to $2,750 USD for each violation.
An example of a prohibited modification is the recalibration of the

fuel system so that the engine will exceed the certified horsepower
or torque.
You should not make a change to an EPA-certified non-road en-

gine that would result in an engine that does not match the engine
configuration certified to meet the Federal Standards.
Customer Assistance
Volvo Construction Equipment wishes to help assure that the
Emission Control System Warranty is properly administered. In the
event that you do not receive the warranty service to which you be-
lieve you are entitled under the Emission Control System Warran-
ty, you should contact the nearest Volvo Construction Equipment
Regional office for assistance.
Presentation
The USA Federal Clean Air Act 21
Normal Non-Road Engine Use

The Maintenance Instructions are based on the assumption that
this conventional machine will be used as designated in the Oper-
ators Instruction Manual and operated only with the specified fuel
and lubrication oils.
Non-Road Engine Maintenance

This is a non-road engine of conventional design and any local
dealer may perform the necessary non-road emission control
maintenance as defined in this manual.
Volvo recommends that the purchaser use the service program for
the non-road engine, known as Preventative Maintenance, includ-
ing the recommended engine emission control maintenance.
In order to document that the proper regular maintenance has

been performed on the non-road engine, Volvo recommends that
the owner keep all records and receipts of such maintenance.
These records or receipts should be transferred to each subse-
quent purchaser of the non-road engine.
Service Performed By Your Local Dealer

Your local dealer is best suited to give you good, dependable serv-
ice since he has trained service technicians and is equipped with
genuine original manufacturer's parts and special tools and the lat-
est technical publications. Discuss your servicing and mainte-
nance requirements with your local dealer. He can tailor a
maintenance program for your needs.
For regular, scheduled service or maintenance, it is advisable to

contact your local dealer in advance to arrange for an appointment
to ensure availability of the correct equipment and service techni-
cian to work on your machine. In this way you will assist your local
dealer in reducing the time required to carry out the service of your
machine.
Presentation
22 The USA Federal Clean Air Act
Preventive Maintenance Program

To retain the dependability, noise level and exhaust emission con-
trol performance originally built into your conventional non-road
engine, it is essential that the non-road engine receives periodic
service, inspections, adjustments and maintenance.
Fuel system
Fuel recommendations:
The fuel used must be clean, completely distilled, stable and non-
corrosive. Distillation range, cetane level and sulfur content are
most important when selecting fuel for optimum combustion and
minimum wear.
Engine working conditions and ambient temperature influence the
selection of the fuel with respect to cold handling properties and
cetane levels.
In cold weather conditions, below 32 ºF (0 ºC), the use of lighter
distillate or higher cetane level fuel are recommended. (Final boil-
ing point max. 660 ºF (349 ºC) and cetane min. 45.).
To avoid excessive deposit formation and to minimize the emis-
sions of sulfur dioxide into the ambient air, the sulfur content of the
fuel should be the lowest available. The diesel fuels recommended
for use in Volvo engines should meet standards according to
ASTM D 975 no. 1D (C-B) or no. 2D (T-T) and have a cetane
number not less than 42 as well as a sulphur content not exceed-
ing 0.05 percent by weight.
Check for fuel leaks (while the engine is running at fast idle):
Visually check unions and hose connections.
Check the condition of the fuel hoses for:

Ageing
Cracks
Blisters
Scuffing
Check the condition of the fuel tank:

Drain condensation water.
Check for cracks.
Check for leaks.
Check the mounting.
Check the turbocharger:

Visually check for leaks in the intake hoses and exhaust pipe of
the turbocharger.
Instrument panels
23
Instrument panels
WARNING!
Do not operate the machine until you are thoroughly famil-
iar with the position and function of the various instru-
ments and controls. Read through this Operator's Manual
thoroughly - your safety is involved!
Keep the manual in the cab so that it always is at hand.
2
1
1015939
4 1053078
Instrument panels
1 Front panel (information display, switches, keypad)

2 Overhead panel (climate control system)
3 Cab post panel (mode selector, switches, ignition switch,
hand-throttle control and power socket 12 V.
4 Rear panel with power socket 24 V, hour recorder, electri-
cal distribution box with fuses and relays, socket for serv-
ice tool)
5 Control panel (optional equipment)
Instrument panels
24 Instrument panel, front
Instrument panel, front

4 4
5 3
3 5
2 2
0 km/h
0 km/h N 700 rpm
N 700 rpm
1 6
1 6
1027053 1045162
Front instrument panel (before 2009-03-04) Front instrument panel (from 2009-03-04)
3 Separate attachment locking (optional equipment) 3 Separate attachment locking (optional equipment)
5 Hazard flashers 5 Hazard flashers
1 Parking brake
2 Keyboard
3 Separate attachment locking (optional equipment)
4 Display unit
5 Hazard flashers
6 Unassigned
1 Parking brake
Parking brake function, see page 70.
1020380
2 Keyboard
Information about keyboard, see page 30.
1026099
Instrument panels
Instrument panel, front 25
3 Separate attachment locking (optional equip-

ment)
WARNING!
Always check that the attachment is mounted correctly on
the attachment bracket by pressing the attachment's front
end against the ground.
This equipment makes it possible for the operator to connect and
disconnect attachments from the operator seat, see page 133.
1030216
When disconnecting attachments, the switch must be switched on

(upper end of switch pressed in). A catch on the switch ensures
that no inadvertent actuation occurs.
NOTE! When the switch is switched on, it is possible to oper-
WARNING ate the tilting and lifting functions simultaneously in order to
align the attachment.
A warning message, "Attachment lock open", will be shown on the
display. Connect the attachment according to page 133.
L67523A
11 111 506
4 Display unit
By taking action in time, it is possible to prevent serious damage
to the machine. Therefore, look now and then at the instrument
panel where the operator is provided with information should
something happen that requires his or her intervention. In order to
be able to check the function of instruments and controls, the cur-
rent must be turned on and the ignition switch be in position 1 (run-
ning position).
0 km/h
N 700 rpm
1027057
5 Hazard flashers
Upper end of switch pressed in = All direction indicators on the ma-
chine will flash in time with the lamp in the switch together with the
control lamp for direction indicators. The hazard flashers can be
used even if the ignition switch key has not been turned on.
6 Unassigned
1020381
Instrument panels
1 2 3
10 11
9 12
7 8 13
6
5 14
4
0 km/h
N 700 rpm
1027056
15 16 17
1 Central warning (red) 10 Direction indicator, right (green)

2 Central warning (amber) 11 Display
3 Information symbol (green) 12 Activated Boom Suspension System (green)
4 High beams (blue) 13 Engaged differential lock (green)
5 Rotating warning beacon (amber) 14 Activated Comfort Drive Control (green)
6 Working lights (amber) 15 Fuel level
7 Applied parking brake (red) 16 Transmission oil temperature
8 Battery charging (red) 17 Coolant temperature
9 Direction indicator, left (green)
1 Central warning (red)

The lamp flashes if abnormal operating values or faults arise.
Alarm text is shown on the display unit. The buzzer will sound until
1021110
the required action has been carried out.
2 Central warning (amber)

The lamp flashes when a function is engaged/disengaged or when
a function needs to be kept under observation (e.g. clogged filter).
1021110
Alarm text is shown on the display unit. The buzzer sounds four
times.
3 Information symbol
Indicates deviation of some kind. Alarm text is shown for 3 sec-
onds on the display unit. The buzzer sounds four times.
1027075
Instrument panels
Instrument panel, front 27
4 High beams
The lamp is alight when the high beams are switched on, see page
72.
1021106
5 Rotating warning beacon

The lamp lights when the rotating warning beacon is switched on.
See page 62.
6 Work lights
The lamp lights when the working lights are switched on, see page
72.
1021107
7 Applied parking brake

The lamp is alight when the parking brake is applied.
The buzzer sounds and alarm text is shown on the display unit, if
1021109 a directional gear is selected.
8 Battery charging
If the lamp lights when operating, the cause must be corrected as
otherwise the batteries may be damaged.
9 Left direction indicators

The light flashes when the lever is moved forward, see page 72.
Uneven flashing pulses indicate a faulty bulb, which then should
1020767
be replaced.
10 Right direction indicators

The light flashes when the lever is moved backward, see page 72.
1020768 Uneven flashing pulses indicate a faulty bulb, which then should
be replaced.
11 Display
0 km/h In addition to alarm texts the display unit also shows starting se-
quence, operating information and settings, see page 29.
N 700 rpm
1026319
12 Boom Suspension System (BSS)

The lamp lights with a fixed light when the Boom Suspension Sys-
1021111
tem is activated.
Instrument panels
13 Differential lock
The lamp is alight when the differential lock is engaged.
The foot switch for the differential lock is positioned on the floor to
1021112 the left of the steering wheel column.
14 Comfort drive control

The lamp lights when the Comfort Drive Control is activated. It is
possible to steer the machine and select gears from the armrest to
1021113 the left of the operator's seat.
NOTE! The ordinary gear selector control should be in neu-
tral.
For further instructions, see page 107.
15 Fuel level
When the pointer indicates at empty, the warning lamp to the left
of the gauge lights up and a message is shown on the display unit.
The machine should be refuelled as soon as possible to avoid air
entering the system.
If the tank has been run dry and the fuel system needs to be bled,
see page 175.
Fuel tank capacity: 269 litres (71.0 US gal)
1021185
16 Transmission oil temperature

If the gauge indicates into the red sector, the warning lamp to the
right of the gauge lights up. As a precaution the engine speed is at
the same time limited.
Stop the machine and investigate the cause.
a directional gear is selected.
1021186
17 Coolant temperature
If the gauge indicates into the red sector, the warning lamp to the
right of the gauge lights up. As a precaution the engine speed is at
the same time limited.
Run the engine at low idling for a few minutes. If the gauge contin-
ues to indicate within the red sector, stop the engine and investi-
gate the cause.
a directional gear is selected.
1021187
Instrument panels
Display 29
Display
On the display unit are shown, current operating information, vehi-
cle messages and alarm texts. With the aid of the keyboard on the
front instrument panel the operator may also have information
about the machine status and make settings.
When the ignition key is turned to position 1, a test programme
starts to verify the system, all control lamps light up for 2 seconds,
the pointers in the gauges then move to indicate the correct value
for fuel level and temperature.
If the machine is equipped with theft protection, the display shows
that the code should be entered, see page 55. The test program
starts after correct code has been entered.
Operating information
If another screen was shown, when the engine was turned off last,
this screen will be shown at the next startup. Press ESC to return
to the Operating Information screen.
XX yyy There are two settings for the operating information display, oper-
zzz zzz vvv rpm ating information 1 and 2. Use ARROW UP/DOWN to choose op-
erating information 1 or 2.
ww ss tt If any information is missing or fails to occur, will be shown.
1026136
Operating Information screen 1 xx Travelling Speed
yyy km/h/mph
Selected gear N/F1/F2/F3/F4/R1/R2/R3/R4
Shows if another gear selector control has been

selected
zzz zzz
XX yyy CDC is shown if CDC Comfort Drive Control is acti-
vated
zzz zzz vvv rpm F/R is shown if the gear selector control on the con-
trol lever carrier is activated
vvv Engine rpm
1026137
Operating Information screen 2 ww Time, 12/24, AM/PM
ss Temperature, C/F
Fuel consumption, average value since it was last

set to zero.
tt (Shows remaining operating time on the residual
fuel, optional equipment)
Symbols
Information available to be retrieved, use key with
this symbol
Vehicle message available to be retrieved, use key
with this symbol.
Engine preheating activated by E-ECU.
Lever lockout activated

Only if the machine has electrical control lever lock-
out.
Instrument panels
30 Display
Keypad for display

With the aid of the keyboard the operator may have information
about the machine status and make settings.
Changing display screen is only possible if the speed is below
20 km/h (12.4 mph).
1026099
ESC
Engine Transmission Hydraulics
1 2 3
Axles / Brakes Electrical system Vehicle

information
4 5 6
SETUP
Vehicle Service Settings

message
7 8 9
SELECT
0
The SELECT key is also used for obtaining more information when one information or check message is shown
on the display unit.
The digit furthest down to the right on each key corresponds to the digit that should be stated during different set-
tings, e.g. the date. On machines equipped with anti-theft device, the digits are used for entering the correct code.
Instrument panels
Display 31
Information
Information about the machine status is obtainable by pressing the
respective function on the keyboard.
Each function group consists of one or more display screens (men-
us).
An arrow pointing downward is shown on the right, if there are
more screens under the function group.
To browse within the function group, press arrow down or arrow
up on the keyboard.
Settings can be made in certain menus. The text is then highlight-
ed.
To revert to the "Operating Information" screen, press the ESC
key.
Selected key
Engine
Coolant temperature
Shows coolant temperature, normal or high.
102799
High
Oil pressure
Shows oil pressure, normal or low.
102799b
Low
Oil level
Shows oil level, normal or low.
102799b
Low
Air filter
Shows whether the air filter is normal or when clogged, a text

Normal message is shown.
Instrument panels
32 Display
Selected key
Engine
Oil temperature
Shows oil temperature, normal or high.
102799
High
Engine rpm
rpm Shows current engine speed.
r/min
Fan speed
rpm Shows current fan speed.

Instrument panels
Display 33
Selected key
Engine
The hydraulic oil temperature must exceed 0 °C (+32 °F) to
make it possible to reverse the cooling fan.
Rev. cooling fan New selection can be made when the text is highlighted.
OFF Shows that the cooling fan is not reversing.
To select a new interval, press SELECT, use the arrow keys to

1027111
make required selection, then press SELECT.
Rev. cooling fan
Short Shows that reversing is selected and the selected interval.

Interval
Shows the duration of the interval in minutes.
1027111
To select a new interval, press SELECT, use the arrow keys to

make required selection, then press SELECT.
Mode reversible fan

Short For manual reversing make a new selection as above and select
Long Manual.
Manual
OFF
Rev. cooling fan

OFF Move down one step with the arrow key.
Interval Press SELECT.
The cooling fan reverses.
1027111
The reversing ceases automatically.
To revert to the "Operating Information" screen, press the ESC

key.
Instrument panels
34 Display
Selected key
Transmission
Oil temperature
102799
High
Oil pressure
Shows oil pressure, low or normal
102799b
Low
Oil level
Shows if oil level is normal or low.
102799b
Low
Oil filter
Normal Shows whether the oil filter is normal or when clogged, a text
message is shown.
Trans. diseng.
ON Select with SELECT, engaged or disengaged transmission dis-
OFF engagement (declutch).
Instrument panels
Display 35
Selected key
Hydraulics
Oil temperature
102799
High
Oil level
Shows oil level, normal or low.
102799b
Low
Boom Suspension System

(BSS)
ON Shows whether the Boom Suspension System is engaged or
OFF disengaged.
The Boom Suspension System must first be activated with the
switch.
Instrument panels
36 Display
Selected key
Axles / Brakes
Brake pressure
Shows brake pressure, low or normal.
102799b
Low
Oil temp. Front axle

102799
High
Oil temp. Rear axle

102799
High
Instrument panels
Display 37
Selected key
Electrical system
Voltage
Shows system voltage
102799
19 28
Selected key
Vehicle information
Operational Data To see operational data, press the SELECT key.
Selected key
Vehicle information
Operational Data Shows operational data since previous setting to zero.

Reset Reset Set operational data to zero with Select
Time h Operating time in hours
Distance km Travelling distance in km/mile
Cycles Number of cycles
Avg. l/h Average consumption litres/USgal per hour
Total l Total consumption, litres/USgal
Resid. time fuel h Remaining operating time on residual fuel (optional equipment)
Instantaneous l/h Current consumption litres/USgal per hour
To return to previous menu press ESC.

Instrument panels
38 Display
For information move downward with the arrow key.

Vehicle information
Operational h See previous screen

Data
Model Lxxxx Machine model designation
Serial no. xxxxx Machine's serial number
Tyres mm Tyre size
Machine h Total operating time of machine
hours
Time xx:xx Real time
Date xxxxxxxx Current date
HW/SW Only accessible for service personnel
To return to previous menu press ESC.
Selected key
Vehicle
messages
Message is available for retrieval
Instrument panels
Display 39
Selected key
Service
Next Service Select but with arrow key, press SELECT

Central lubrication
Test
I/0-List
Service
Next service Selected menu

Resid. Time h Shows residual time left to service from previously acknowl-
edged service
Interval h Shows selected service interval
Confirm service No To confirm service: Press SELECT to confirm performed serv-
Yes ice.
"No" will change to "Yes" for a few seconds and then
reverts to showing "No". Service is now confirmed.
NOTE! Alarm for service is generated eight hours before the end
of the interval. Service can only be acknowledged during these
eight hours. If the eight hour interval passes without acknowl-
edgement of service, the alarm for service is removed.
To go back and make a new selection, press ESC

To go back to Operating Information screen, press ESC twice
Instrument panels
40 Display
Service
Central lubrication Selected menu

Interval Light Shows the selected interval. To make a new selection, press
SELECT. The screen shows an example
To go back and make a new selection, press ESC

Selected key
Service
Central lubrication To change interval, press SELECT

Interval
Light Select interval by moving up or down with the arrow keys.
Normal
Heavy
To confirm selection of interval, press SELECT
To return, press ESC

Service
Test Selected menu

Bulb test OFF Testing warning and control lamps in the centre instrument
Brake test Off See also page, 109.
Use SELECT to choose "Off or "On"

To return, press ESC
Instrument panels
Display 41
Selected key
SETUP Settings Shows previous setting.
Select row by moving up or down with the arrow keys.
Date Shows set date
Time Shows set time
Language Shows selected language
Units Shows set unit
Clock options Shows set clock option
Date format Shows set date format
Display Shows set display, Inverted or Normal
Intensity Shows display light intensity in %

Instrument panels
42 Display
Settings
To make a new setting, select row by moving up or down with the
arrow keys.
Date
1 Press SETUP.
2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Date".
3 Press SELECT.
4 Enter the correct date with the aid of the keyboard.
5 Confirm with SELECT.
6 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings.
7 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.
Time
1 Press SETUP.
2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to highlight the "Time" menu.
3 Press SELECT.
4 Use SELECT to shift between hours and minutes. Enter the
correct time with the aid of the keyboard.
Language
1 Press SETUP.
2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the "Language" menu.
3 Press SELECT.
4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight language.
5 Press SELECT to view the language alternatives.
6 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the required language.
8 Press ESC to return to Settings.
Instrument panels
Display 43
Units
1 Press SETUP.
2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the "Units" menu.
4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight unit.
5 Select with SELECT the required unit.
The following unit alternatives are available:

Metric system
US system
Clock options
1 Press SETUP.
2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Clock options".
3 Press SELECT.
4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight display alternative.
5 Select with SELECT the required display alternative.
The following display alternatives are available:
am pm
24 hr
Instrument panels
44
Date format
1 Press SETUP.
2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Date format".
3 Press SELECT.
4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight display alternative.
year - month - day
month - day - year
Display
1 Press SETUP.
2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Display".
3 Press SELECT.
Day / Night mode
4 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Day / Night
mode".
5 Press SELECT.
6 Browse with ARROW DOWN in order to highlight mode.
day
night
Intensity
1 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Intensity".
2 Press SELECT.
3 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight intensity.
4 Press SELECT.
5 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the required intensity.
Instrument panels
45
Alarm texts
The information to the operator is provided on the display unit in
the form of alarm texts, which are divided into three classes: Warn-
ing, Check and Information. For all classes applies that at speeds
above 20 km/h (12.4 mph) the alarm text is shown for three sec-
onds and is then alternated with the previous screen which is
shown for three seconds. This alternate showing of the two
screens continues as long as the error situation remains, or alter-
natively until the alarm is shown a certain number of times.
Information
The information symbol is shown.
The buzzer sounds four times.
Alarm text is shown for three seconds and then changes to Op-
erating Information screen.
Rectify or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE for infor-
mation.
Engine
Information Information
Coolant output reduced Automatic engine shutdown
Check radiator
Transmission
Gear selector
not in neutral
Machine speed too Reduce speed before downshifting

high for current gear
Axles
Front axle oil Rear axle oil
rising temperature rising temperature
Instrument panels
46
Steering system
Lever carrier deactivated Lever carrier not activated
CDC activated CDC activated
Miscellaneous
Accelerate over 20 km/h Brake to standstill
Low washer fluid level* Brake test failed
*) The level is checked continuously during operation.
Miscellaneous
Brake test Brake test log
2 x.x m/s2
Retardation x m/s 1: xx bar
Pressure xx bar 2: xx bar x.x m/s2
3: xx bar x.x m/s2
Miscellaneous
Check Information
Lubricant level low Go to
Check at next stop Service mode
Information
Exit
Service mode
Instrument panels
47
Warning
Red central warning lamp will be flashing.
The buzzer will sound until the required action has been carried
out.
The alarm text will be shown until the required action has been
taken.
Take appropriate action or contact a workshop authorised by
Volvo CE for information.
Warning Warning
Stop vehicle Stop vehicle
Turn Off Engine
These two warnings are always followed by a further alarm text. Follow the instructions on the screen and rectify
or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE. When a warning is shown, the engine should be turned off and
the ignition key turned to position 1 in order to show the subsequent alarm text.
Engine
Warning Warning
High coolant temperature High charge-air temperature
engine engine
High engine oil Low engine oil pressure

temperature
Coolant level low* Engine failure
High fuel temperature High crankcase pressure
*) The level is checked continuously during operation.
Transmission
Warning Warning
High transmission oil Low transmission oil pressure
temperature
Instrument panels
48
Brakes
Warning Warning
Low brake pressure Applied parking brake
Brakes failure Parking brake NOT applied
Axles
Warning Warning
High oil temperature High oil temperature
front axle rear axle
Steering system
Warning Warning
Low steer pressure* Steering system failure
*) Applies only to machines equipped with secondary steering.
Hydraulics
Warning Warning
Low hydraulic oil level** High hydraulic oil temperature
Attachment lock open Low steer pressure*
**) The level is checked continuously during operation.
Miscellaneous
Warning Warning
Reduce speed Direction change at
too high speed
Instrument panels
49
Check
Amber central warning lamp will be flashing.
The buzzer sounds four times.
Press SELECT to obtain more information about the fault.
Alarm text is shown until confirmation is done by pressing ESC.
Rectify or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE for infor-
mation.
Engine
Check Check
Engine failure Engine system failure
Cooling fan system failure Cooling fan reversal failure
Clogged air filter engine Fuel level sensor
Preheating failure Fuel level low
Hand throttle failure High temp. starter motor

Wait 5 min. before start
High coolant temperature High charge-air temperature

engine engine
Coolant level low Injection system failure

Check at next stop
High engine oil Water in fuel

temperature Empty cup
Instrument panels
50
Electrical system
Check Check
High system voltage Low system voltage
ECC failure Relay failure

Instrument panels
51
Transmission
Check Check
Transmission failure Transmission oil filter clogged
Gear sel. CDC failure Gear sel. F/N/R failure

Check at next stop Check at next stop
Gear sel. F/R failure Gear sel. failure

Check at next stop Check at next stop
Reduced gearshift function Reduced gearshift function

No reverse gear
Reduced gearshift function Transmission oil level low

No forward gear
Sensor transmission oil filter Transmission oil pressure

sensor
Transmission oil temp. sensor Transmission failure

Instrument panels
52
Axles
Check Check
Axle failure Temperature sensor axle oil
Diff. lock failure
Brakes
Check Check
Brake system Brakes failure
Parking brake failure

Check at next stop
Steering system
Check Check
Steering system failure Secondary steer pump
failure
CDC failure Secondary steer failure

Instrument panels
53
Hydraulics
Check Check
Hydraulic system failure Attachment lock
Check attachment lock BSS Failure

and confirm*
Hydraulics failure Return-to-Dig failure
Temperature sensor hydraulics LS press sensor failure
Hydraulic pump failure
*) Confirm with SELECT

Instrument panels
54
Miscellaneous
Check Check
ECU network ECU network
Communication Interrupt Reduced Communication
APS control Central lubrication

failure
Wiper failure Rear wiper failure
Accelerator failure Residual time XXX h

Next service YYYY h*
Parameter failure Accelerator pedal sensor
Ambient temp. sensor Limp Home

safety related failure
*) XXX = number of hours remaining to next service, YYYY = next service interval.
*) Computer malfunction between the ECUs. The machine can only be operated in first or second gear. Only op-
erating information and alarms are available on the display unit.
**) Contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE for information.
Instrument panels
55
Anti-theft system
The anti-theft device prevents theft of the machine as:
the engine does not start
the gear selector does not work
the parking brake cannot be released.
When starting the engine

Anti-theft system
1 Turn the ignition key to position 1.
2 Wait until the following screen is shown on the display unit.
Enter code
****
3 Enter the four-digit code on the keyboard.

When the correct code has been entered, the anti-theft device
becomes deactivated and the engine can be started.
Use the ESC key to move the cursor to the left to change an
incorrectly entered digit.
When the code has been entered, and one of the digits is incor-
rect, the system automatically returns to the position for the first
digit. Enter the code again.
1026099
The code can only be changed by a workshop authorised by
Volvo CE.
The engine can be restarted within 60 seconds after it was

stopped without having to enter the code.
Instrument panels
56 Instrument panel, cab post
Instrument panel, cab post
1 Mode selector, gear-shifting programme (APS III)

2 Unassigned
1 3 Fully automatic downshifting (1-4), FAPS
4 Unassigned
5 Unassigned
2 3
6 Bucket positioner
5 7 Boom kick-out
4
8 Hold function, 3rd hydraulic function
9 Return-to-Dig (optional equipment)
6 7 10 Floating position
11 Single-acting lifting function (optional equipment)
8 9
12 Unassigned
13 Function selector, Boom Suspension System (optional
10 11 equipment)
14 Front working lights
12 13 15 Rear working lights
16 Lights
14 15 17 Rotating warning beacon (optional equipment)

18 Electrically adjustable rear view mirrors (optional equip-
16 17 ment)
19 Electrically heated rear view mirrors (optional equip-
18 ment)
20 20 Wiper and washer, rear window
19 21 Hydraulic emergency stop (optional equipment)
22 Ignition switch
21 22 23 Unassigned
24 Rheostat, instrument lighting, guide light in switches
25 Hand-throttle control (optional equipment)
23 24 26 12 V power socket
25
26
Instrument panels
Instrument panel, cab post 57
1 Mode selector, gear-shifting programme (APS

III)
Position L
The machine shifts at low engine speed and low travelling speed.
Position M
The machine shifts at slightly higher engine speed as compared
with position L.
1020388
NOTE! If the accelerator is depressed fully with the selector in
the "L" position, upshifting according to the "H" position will
take place.
The best utilisation is obtained if the accelerator is not depressed
fully, as the difference in upshifting speed between the (L-M-H)
modes will be more noticeable.
Position H
The machine does not shift until higher engine and travelling
speeds have been reached.
Preferably used in cases where the machine changes gear when
operating uphill or when the rolling resistance is great.
Position AUT
The machine itself selects APS mode according to current operat-
ing condition to achieve best comfort and economy.
Mode 1023178
(Service mode)
The machine starts and operates in the selected gear position. Up-
shifts and downshifts on the move are controlled manually.
Further gear shifting instructions, see page 103.
2 Unassigned
3 Fully automatic downshifting, FAPS

Upper end of switch pressed in = automatic downshifting to 1st
gear when required. (Downshifting via any of the kick-down but-
tons can still be done manually)
Lower end of switch pressed in = downshifting to 1st gear can be
done via any of the kick-down buttons.
1020386
4 Unassigned
Instrument panels
5 Unassigned
6 Bucket positioner
Switch, upper part pressed in = hold function for tilt position acti-
vated, see page 78.
Switch, lower part pressed in = hold function for tilt position deac-
tivated.
1020399
7 Boom kick-out
Upper end of switch pressed in = adjusting lifting height, see page
78.
Lower end of switch pressed in = detent function lifting deactivat-
ed.
1020398
8 Hold function, 3rd hydraulic function

Switch, upper part pressed in = activation of hold function.
Switch, lower part pressed in = hold function deactivated
1020396a
9 Return-to-Dig (optional equipment)

Upper end of switch pressed in = adjusting lowering position, see
page 79.
Lower end of switch pressed in = detent function lowering deacti-
vated.
1020401
Instrument panels
10 Floating position
Upper end of switch pressed in = Floating position engaged when
the control lever for lifting/lowering has been moved to floating po-
sition.
Switch, lower part pressed in = Normal lift/lower function.
1030427
Float mode/Return-to-Dig (optional equipment)

Upper end of switch pressed in = Floating position engaged when
the control lever for lifting/lowering has been moved to floating po-
sition.
Switch, lower part pressed in = Normal lift/lower function.
The function "Return-to-Dig" is engaged when the attachment is
above the ground and when the control lever for the lifting arms is
1030426 moved to detent position for full lowering.
The Return-to-Dig function can only be activated when the attach-
ment is above ground. If the attachment is close to the ground, the
floating position will be engaged instead.
11 Single-acting lifting function (optional equip-

ment)
Upper end of switch pressed in = single-acting lifting function acti-
vated.
Lower end of switch pressed in = single-acting lifting function de-
activated.
1020396
The attachment can now rise, e.g. if it encounters uneven ground,
but will return to the original position under its own weight.
12 Unassigned
Instrument panels
13 Function selector, Boom Suspension System

The switch has three positions. When starting the engine, the func-
tion reverts to the previously preselected position.
Regarding settings of Boom Suspension System in combination
with different attachments, see section "Operating techniques".
Upper end of switch pressed in = Speed-dependent
Boom Suspension System (regardless of the gear selector posi-
1020397
tion).
The control lamp for the Boom Suspension System is alight and
on the display unit under the menu hydraulics is shown BSS
On or BSS Off depending on whether the system is engaged
or disengaged (speed-dependent).
The Boom Suspension System will be engaged, if a certain
speed is exceeded.
Below a certain speed (approx. 5 km/h (3.1 mph) in forward
drive or approx. 2 km/h (1.2 mph) in neutral or reverse drive)
the function will be disengaged.
Switch in centre position = Gear-dependent Boom Suspen-
sion System.
The control lamp for the Boom Suspension System is alight and
on the display unit under the menu hydraulics is shown BSS
On or BSS Off depending on whether the system is engaged
or disengaged (gear-dependent).
The Boom Suspension System is engaged in gear positions 2,
3 and 4 when in neutral, forward or reverse drive.
When changing down (kick-down) to gear position 1, the func-
tion will be disengaged.
Lower end of switch pressed in = Deactivated Boom Suspen-
sion System.
Instrument panels
14 Front working lights

Upper end of switch pressed in = working lights by cab roof and
lower working lights switched on.
Switch in centre position = working lights by cab roof switched on.
Lower end of switch pressed in = front working lights switched off.
If the machine, as optional extra, is provided with working lights,

1020403 which have a bulb of the HID type (High Intensity gas Discharge
lamp), see page 188.
There is a delay of up to 90 seconds (depending on the ambi-
ent temperature) before a bulb of the HID type reaches full
power. Therefore, do not switch off the working lights more
often than necessary.
Control lamp on the front instrument panel indicates that working
lights are switched on.
15 Rear working lights

Upper end of switch pressed in = rear working lights are switched
on when the reverse is engaged.
Switch in centre position = all rear working lights switched on.
Lower end of switch pressed in = the function is deactivated.
Control lamp on the front instrument panel indicates that working

1020404
lights are switched on.
OBS! Working lights should be off when travelling on public

roads.
16 Lights
Upper end of switch pressed in = travel lights switched on.
Switch in centre position = parking and instrument lighting
switched on.
Lower end of switch pressed in = lights switched off.
Switching between high/low beams, see page 72.
1017895
Control lamp on the front instrument panel indicates that the high
beams are switched on.
Instrument panels
17 Rotating warning beacon (optional equipment)

Upper end of switch pressed in = Rotating warning beacon
switched on, see also page 98.
Lower end of switch pressed in = Rotating warning beacon
switched off.
Control lamp on the front instrument panel indicates that the warn-
ing beacon is connected.
1020409
18 Electrically adjustable rear view mirrors

Select left or right rear-view mirror by turning the button in the mid-
dle.
Adjust the mirror by pressing according to the arrows, upward or
downward, left or right.
1026243
19 Electrically heated rear view mirrors (optional

equipment)
Upper end of switch pressed in = electric heating activated.
Lower end of switch pressed in = electric heating deactivated.
1020410
Instrument panels
20 Wiper and washer, rear window

NOTE! For wiping and washing to take place, the windscreen
wiper must be switched on.
Upper end of switch pressed in (spring return) = washing and the

wiper makes a few strokes.
Switch in centre position = rear window wiper operates intermit-
tently.
1020411
When the windscreen wiper is on at the same time as the reverse
gear is engaged, the rear window wiper will be on constantly.
Lower end of switch pressed in = wiper and washer turned off.
Washer reservoir for windscreen and rear window, see page 196.
21 Hydraulic emergency stop (optional equipment)

Hydraulic emergency stop for rotating attachment. The emergency
stop turns off the power to the attachment and stops its movement.
See page 153.
1026244
22 Ignition switch
Ignition switch positions
0 Switched off (key-turn engine stop)

R Radio position
1 Running position
2 Starting position
1026348
Instrument panels
23 Unassigned
24 Rheostat, guide light in switches

Guide light in switches and lighting of the climate control system
panel
Upper end of switch pressed in = the light intensity increases
Lower end of switch pressed in = the light intensity reduces.
NOTE! Headlights or work lights must be on.
1021178
25 Hand-throttle control (optional equipment)

The accelerator position is transferred electrically.
The accelerator position is altered by turning the control. Turn-
ing clockwise increases the speed.
Depending on previous adjustment, the control may first have
r / min to be turned counter-clockwise and then clockwise in order to
set the speed.
Disengagement takes place when applying throttle pedal or
L67480A
brake pedal.
When starting the engine, the hand-throttle is disengaged, re-
gardless of previous setting.
12 V 26 12 V power socket
For charging of, for example, mobile telephone.
1020413
Instrument panels
Instrument panel, overhead 65
Instrument panel, overhead

Climate control system
2 3 4 5
26
24
22
1 20
18
1020417
1 Air conditioning
2 Cab ventilation / interval heating
3 Fan control
4 Temperature control
5 Air distribution control
Information about climate control system, see page 86.

Instrument panels
66 Rear cab wall
Rear cab wall
1 2
3
1027058
1 Electric power socket, 24 V (e.g., for cigarette lighter)

2 Operating hour meter
3 VCADS Pro service socket
(the cover for the electrical distribution box has been removed)
Fuse test
It is possible to test fuses.
On the circuit board (behind the cover for the electrical distribution
box) there is the marking FUSE TEST.
To test whether a fuse has blown or not, hold it against the contact
surface under the mark FUSE TEST.
If the fuse has not blown, the green light emitting diode above the
mark lights up.
FUSE TEST
1027074
Fuse test
Instrument panels
Control panel (optional equipment) 67
Control panel (optional equip-

A ment)
A The safety seal is broken if the plastic cover (A) is raised.
B Hold in the button for 1 second to activate the sprinkler system
B when fire is indicated. The engine is not stopped. Can be used
when the machine has to be moved at the same time as the
C system is activated.
C The light-emitting diode is red when fire is detected, and the si-
D ren and strobe light are activated at the same time. To activate
E the sprinkler system with the manual activation button, see be-
F low.
G D The light-emitting diode is yellow when there is a malfunction of
the activation function. If the light-emitting diode is on, contact
H a workshop authorized by Volvo CE.
E The light-emitting diode is yellow when there is a malfunction of
the detector circuit. If the light-emitting diode is on, contact a
1043939 workshop authorized by Volvo CE.
A Plastic cover F The light-emitting diode is yellow when the system is in manual
B Manual release (activation) mode, that is, the parking brake is released.
C Fire alarm G The light-emitting diode is green when the machine is parked
D Fault actuator and when the system is in automatic mode. The system is sup-
E Fault detector plied with electric power (the system is supplied with electricity
even when the battery disconnector is off).
F Manual
G On H Test button: When the test button is pressed in, a function
H Test/Reset check takes place of the system and the light-emitting diodes.
All light-emiting diodes, the siren, and strobe light are activated
for approx. three seconds. Daily test is recommended.
NOTE! When using button B on the control panel, the engine
is not stopped. The machine can be moved during the time
that fire extinguishing is in progress (the system is activated).
Operator's choice depending on the situation.
Function check
NOTE! The plastic cover should not be raised.
Check daily that the system works.
Press the test button (H) on the control panel.
In case of a malfunction indication, contact a workshop au-
thorized by Volvo CE.
Instrument panels
68
Other controls
Controls 69
Other controls
Controls
4 5 6 7
3 8
2 9
10,11
1
12,13
14
1015939
1030428
1 Comfort Drive Control, CDC (optional equipment) 8 Headlight dipper / windscreen washer, direction
indicators, windscreen wiper
2 Parking brake 9 Accelerator pedal
3 Gear selector control, horn 10 Control lever carrier: working hydraulics, kick-
down, engine braking, control lever lockout, for-
ward/reverse shifting, forward/reverse activation,
horn
4 Brake pedal 11 Control lever carrier for electric servo lever control
(optional equipment): working hydraulics, kick-
down, engine braking, control lever lockout, for-
ward/reverse shifting, forward/reverse activation,
horn
5 Differential lock 12 Arm rest, adjusting
6 Brake pedal 13 Arm rest, adjusting electric servo lever control

7 Steering wheel adjustment 14 Emergency stop, engine (optional equipment)

Other controls
70 Controls
1 Comfort Drive Control, CDC (optional equip-

ment)
The equipment consists of a folding arm rest where three oper-
ating functions are collected: steering, forward/reverse and
kick-down.
57179
The functions are activated by folding down the arm rest and
pressing the activating button.
When the system is activated, a control lamp on the centre in-
strument panel is on.
2 Parking brake
The control lamp lights when the parking brake is applied. If the
parking brake is applied when a directional gear is selected, the
red central warning lamp begins to flash, the buzzer begins to
sound and alarm text is shown on the display unit.
57172
The catch on the switch prevents the parking brake from being
released inadvertently.
Application
Move the gear selector to neutral.
Press in the lower end of the switch. The machine must be at a
complete standstill before applying the parking brake.
Turn the ignition key to the "0" position.
If the engine is turned off without the parking brake having first
been applied, it will be applied automatically.
Releasing
Slide down the catch and press in the upper end of the switch.
Releasing (if the parking brake has been applied automatical-

ly):
Press in the lower end of the switch.
Slide down the catch and press in the upper end of the switch.
1020380 The following applies up to and incl. serial number:

L110F 4391; 61878; 70660
L120F 24924; 66728; 71989
NOTE! If a directional gear has been engaged, the engine

speed must be increased to 1600 rpm to allow the parking
brake to be released (safety function). This way of releas-
ing the brake must not be used instead of releasing it with
the aid of the switch.
Other controls
Controls 71
3 Gear selector control

Shifting between the different speed gears is done by turning
the control.
NOTE! Never leave the machine with the gear selector in for-
ward or reverse, while the engine is running.
1027043 For further instructions on gear shifting, see page 103.
Forward/Reverse
Selector in position F = Operating forward
Selector in position N = Neutral
Selector in position R = Operating rearward
1027044
Horn
Button pressed in = Horn
4 Brake pedal
1027045
5 Differential lock
The differential lock only affects the front axle.
It is engaged by depressing the foot switch and it remains en-
gaged as long as the foot switch is kept depressed.
L66345A
The control lamp on the centre instrument panel is alight when
the lock is engaged.
IMPORTANT! The differential lock may only be used when

operating on slippery ground.
When operating on firm ground, particularly when turning, the
lock must be disengaged.
If there is danger of getting stuck, engage the differential lock
before the machine has got stuck.
If the machine has become stuck and one of the wheels is slip-
ping, the wheel must be stopped before engaging the differen-
tial lock. Otherwise the drive axle system may be damaged.
6 Brake pedal
Other controls
72 Controls
7 Steering wheel adjustment

The control is positioned to the right under the steering wheel.
Control upward = Adjustment of height
1019905 Control downward = Adjustment of steering wheel inclination
8 Headlight dipper
Away from steering wheel = High beams
1027047
Neutral position = Low beams
Towards steering wheel = Headlight flasher
Direction indicator control

Control forward = Left direction indicators
Control rearward = Right direction indicators
1027048
Windscreen wiper
Position 0 = Neutral position
Position --- = Intermittent wiper*
Positions I and II = Windscreen wiper (two speeds)
1027046 *) It is possible to change the length of the interval.
The start key shall be in position 1.
First turn the control to the intermittent wiping position and allow
the wipers to operate for a while, then turn the control to position 0
and wait for the period of time you want the new interval to last and
again turn the control to the intermittent wiping position.
When the engine is turned off by turning the ignition key to position
0, the duration of the interval between the wiping actions returns to
the basic setting.
Windscreen washer
Button pressed in = Windscreen washer on
1027049
9 Accelerator pedal
The accelerator position is transferred electrically.
Other controls
Controls 73
10 Control lever carrier and control functions

9 5 6 7 5 6 7
4 3 2 1 3 2 1 8
8
10 10
1027050 1027051
2 1 Lever (1) for the lifting function has three positions: lifting,
neutral and lowering.
Detent function, lifting / boom kick-out
A A Activation and selection of detent function lifting or alternatively
boom kick-out is done with the switch. Thereafter the control lever
B B is moved to the max. lifting position.
C C Detent function lifting = the control lever remains in the lifting
position even after the lifting arms have reached the max. lifting
position, after which the control lever has to be moved back to
1027039
neutral by hand.
2 1
Boom kick-out = the control lever remains in the lifting position
A Tilting forward A Lowering position until the lifting arms have reached a predetermined height.
B Neutral position B Neutral position Thereafter it returns to neutral automatically.
C Tilting rearward C Lifting position
Hold function float mode / Return-to-Dig (optional equipment)

The function "Return-to-Dig" is activated with the switch. It is the
same switch for both floating position and Return-to-Dig function.
The function "Return-to-Dig" is engaged when the attachment is
above the set lower position and when the control lever for the lift-
ing arms is moved to detent position for full lowering.
The Return-to-Dig function can only be activated when the attach-
ment is above ground. If the attachment is under the set lower po-
1030427 1030426 sition, then float mode is engaged instead.
Floating position Float mode/Return-to-
Dig (optional equip-
ment)
Tilting lever (2) has three positions: rearward, neutral and for-
ward.
Detent function tilting (bucket positioner)
Activation of bucket positioner, is done with the switch. Thereafter
the control lever is moved to max. rearward tilting position.
When the rearward movement of the attachment reaches a prede-
termined position, the control lever returns to neutral automatically.
1020399 1020398
Bucket positioner Boom kick-out

Other controls
74 Controls
Control lever (3) for the 3rd hydraulic function (optional

equipment)
Double-acting hydraulic outlets are used, if the machine, for ex-
ample, is equipped with a timber grapple.
May also be used for hydraulically powered rotating attach-
ments. When such attachments are used the control lever can
be equipped with detent function. The detent function can be
quickly disengaged with an emergency stop.
Control lever (4) for the 4th hydraulic function (optional
equipment)
Double-acting hydraulic outlets, are used, for example, for a
further function in the timber grapple.
Kick-down (5)
The function can be selected from the control lever carrier, the
gear selector control (see page 105) and from the Comfort
Drive Control (optional equipment), see page 107.
Horn (6)
Engine braking / downshifting (7)

Is used to obtain an immediate downshift when operating
downhill, or to prevent undesired upshifting, see also page 105.
Directional gear F-N-R (8)

To be able to use the forward/reverse function on the control le-
ver carrier, the activating button (10) must first be depressed.
After activation F/R is shown: in front of the selected directional
gear on the display unit on the Operating Information screen
Switch in the forward position = Operating forward
Switch in centre position = Neutral
Switch in rearward position = Operating in reverse
If the ordinary gear selector control by the steering wheel is
moved from neutral, while operating with the F/R switch, the
gear selector at the steering wheel will override the switch.
A new activation of the system requires that the activating but-
ton (10) is pressed again.
Control lever lockout (9)

Locks the control levers in neutral. The control lever lockout is
used in order to avoid involuntary actuation of the control le-
vers, for example when servicing or transporting the machine.
NOTE! On machines with a 4th hydraulic function, the control
lever lockout is electrical. Control lever lockout is achieved
o with the switch, thus disengaging the hydraulic function of
the control levers.
1027060
Switch, control lever lockout Activating directional gear (10)

NOTE! The ordinary gear selector control by the steering
wheel and the switch on the control lever carrier must, when
activating, be in neutral. The Comfort Drive Control (optional
equipment) must not be activated.
If the ordinary gear selector control is actuated, the gear-shifting
function at the control lever carrier is lost and the selection made
with the ordinary gear selector control applies.
Other controls
Controls 75
11 Control lever carrier and control functions,

electric servo lever control (optional equip-
ment)
2 1 5 6
7
A
8
A B 3 2 1
B C 4 9
C D
1016158 10
2 1
A Tilting forward A Floating position
B Neutral position B Lowering position
C Tilting rearward C Neutral position
D Lifting position 1030437
Control lever carrier and control functions, electric servo le-

ver control (optional equipment)
When working in an area where there is risk of electromagnetic
fields, EMF, see page 129.
Lever (1) for the lifting function has four positions: lifting,
neutral and lowering and floating.
Detent function, lifting / boom kick-out
Upper end of switch pressed in = adjusting lifting height (spring-re-
turn position), see page 79.
Switch in centre position = detent function for lifting to set height
activated.
1020398
Lower end of switch pressed in = detent function lifting deactivat-
ed.
Lifting / boom kick-out
The detent function is activated with the switch.
Thereafter the control lever is moved to the max. lifting position.
The control lever remains in the lifting position until the lifting arms
have reached a predetermined height. Thereafter it returns to neu-
tral automatically.
Detent function Return-to-Dig

Upper end of switch pressed in = adjusting lowering position
(spring-return position), see page 79.
Switch in centre position = detent function lowering to set lowering
position activated.
Lower end of switch pressed in = detent function lowering deacti-
vated.
1020401
Return-to-Dig Thereafter the control lever is moved to the max. lowering position.
The control lever remains in lowering position until the lifting arms
have returned to a predetermined position. Thereafter it returns to
neutral automatically.
NOTE! For the lever to remain held in position by the detent
function, the attachment must be in a level position or be
moving towards a level position.
Other controls
76 Controls
Detent function floating position

The function is activated with the switch.
Position 0 = Not activated
Position 1 = Lower end of switch pressed in = Floating position
connected.
NOTE! Return-to-Dig has priority over floating position. To be
able to engage floating position, the switch for Return-to-Dig
1030427
must be in position 0.
Floating position
Tilting lever (2) has three positions: rearward, neutral and for-
ward.
Detent function tilting (bucket positioner)
Upper end of switch pressed in = setting tilting position (spring-re-
turn action), see page 79.
Switch in centre position = detent function for tilting position acti-
vated.
1020399
Switch, lower part pressed in = hold function for tilt position deac-
tivated.
Bucket positioner
The detent function is activated with the switch.

Thereafter the control lever is moved to max. rearward tilting posi-
tion.
When the rearward movement of the attachment reaches a prede-
termined position, the control lever returns to neutral automatically.
Control lever (3) for the 3rd hydraulic function (optional

equipment)
Double-acting hydraulic outlets, are used if the machine, for exam-
ple, is equipped with a timber grapple.
May also be used for hydraulically powered rotating attachments.
When such attachments are used the control lever can be
equipped with detent function. The detent function can be quickly
disengaged with an emergency stop.
Control lever (4) for the 4th hydraulic function (optional

equipment)
Double-acting hydraulic outlets, are used, for example, for a fur-
ther function in the timber grapple.
Horn (5)
Kick-down (6)
The function can be selected from the control lever carrier or the
comfort drive control (optional equipment), see page 106.
Other controls
Controls 77
Engine braking / downshifting (7)

Is used to obtain an immediate downshift when operating downhill,
or to prevent undesired upshifting, see page 106.
Directional gear F-N-R (8)
To be able to use the Forward/Reverse function on the control le-
ver carrier, the activating button (7) must first be depressed.
After activation F/R is shown: in front of the selected directional
gear on the display unit on the Operating Information screen
Switch in the forward position = Operating forward
Switch in centre position = Neutral
Switch in rearward position = Operating in reverse
If the ordinary gear selector control by the steering wheel is moved
from neutral, while operating with the F/R switch, the gear selector
at the steering wheel will override the switch.
A new activation of the system requires that the activating button
(10) is pressed again.
Activating directional gear F-N-R on control lever carrier (9)

NOTE! The ordinary gear selector control by the steering
wheel and the switch on the control lever carrier must, when
activating, be in neutral. The Comfort Drive Control (optional
equipment) must not be activated.
If the ordinary gear selector control is actuated, the gear-shifting
function at the control lever carrier is lost and the selection made
with the ordinary gear selector control applies.
Control lever lockout (10)

The control lever lockout is used in order to avoid involuntary ac-
tuation of the control levers, for example when servicing or trans-
porting the machine.
Lower end of switch pressed in = Hydraulic function of control le-
vers disengaged.
The switch is provided with a catch to prevent involuntary actua-
tion.
1021207
Amber central warning and text on the display unit show that the
Switch, control lever lockout control lever lockout function is activated.
Other controls
78 Controls
Bucket positioner
The bucket positioner enables the bucket to stop automatically in
a preset position. This will result in shorter cycle times and reduces
wear. Adjust to desired bucket position according to the following
instructions.
Adjusting tilting rearwards

1020399 1 Move the bucket to the required position.
Bucket positioner 2 Stop the engine, but leave the ignition key in running position.
3 Slacken the nuts for the bracket and move the sensor to its rear
position.
4 Switch on the switch for the bucket positioner.
5 Move the tilting lever to the rear detent position.
6 Displace the sensor toward the rod until the light emitting diode
lights up.
7 Tighten the nuts for the bracket.
Operation
When the control lever is moved to tilt-back (with switch on), the
L67077A
lever is locked and the movement continues to preset position, af-
Sensor, bucket positioner ter which the lever returns to neutral position.
IMPORTANT! The distance (A) between the sensors and the
actuating part of the machine should be 35 mm (0.12
A 0.20 in). See the adjacent figure.
L41037A
Boom kick-out
The boom kick-out enables the lift arms to stop automatically in a
preset position. This will result in shorter cycle times and reduces
wear. Adjust to desired lifting height according to the following in-
structions.
Adjusting lift height

1020398 1 Raise the lifting arms to the required position.
Boom kick-out 2 Stop the engine, but leave the ignition key in running position.
3 Slacken the nut for the bracket and move the sensor to its rear
position.
4 Switch on the switch for the boom kick-out.
5 Move the lifting lever to the rear detent position.
6 Displace the sensor forward until the lifting lever returns to neu-
tral.
7 Tighten the nut for the bracket.
Operation
L67078A
When the control lever is moved to lift (with switch on), lever is
Sensor, boom kick-out locked and the movement continues to preset position, after which
the lever returns to neutral position.
Other controls
Controls 79
Boom kick-out and bucket positioner

(Electric servo)
Boom kick-out and bucket positioner causes the attachment and
the lifting arms automatically to stop in predetermined positions.
This will result in shorter cycle times and reduced wear. The ad-
justments of the required position for the attachment or the re-
quired height when lifting are done according to the instructions
given below.
During all adjustments the machine should be at normal working
temperature.
Adjustment is done from the operator position with the engine run-
ning.
Operation
When either of the control levers is moved to lifting, lowering or
tilting rearwards (with switched on switches) the lever is kept in
the detent position and the movement continues to a predeter-
mined position, whereafter the lever returns to neutral.
Adjusting lift height

1 Raise the lifting arms to the required position.
2 Press and keep the switch pressed in in the spring-return posi-
tion. After approx. 2 seconds the setting is confirmed through
a short signal from the instrument panel buzzer.
1020398
Switch, boom kick-out
Adjusting tilting rearwards

1 First tilt the attachment forward.
2 Then tilt the attachment upward to the required position.
a short signal from the instrument panel buzzer.
1020399
Switch, bucket positioner
Return-to-Dig
1 First lay the attachment on the ground.
2 Then lift the attachment to the required position above the
ground.
1020401 a short signal from the instrument panel buzzer.
Switch, Return-to-Dig
Other controls
80 Controls
12 Arm rest, adjusting

The arm rests for control lever carrier and Comfort Drive Control
(optional equipment) and the control lever carrier can be adjusted
to give the operator an as comfortable operating position as possi-
ble.
Adjusting arm rest for control lever carrier

A Up/down
B 1 Loosen handle A and adjust to required height and angle.
2 Tighten the handle.
Adjusting control lever carrier

B Forward/rearward
1 Loosen locking knob B and adjust to required angle.
A 1027072 2 Tighten locking knob.
Adjusting arm rest for Comfort Drive Control

C Adjusting sideways
1 Loosen locking knob C and adjust sideways to required posi-
tion.
2 Tighten locking knob.
D Adjusting vertically
1 Loosen locking knob D and adjust vertically.
2 Tighten locking knob.
1030655
Other controls
Controls 81
13 Arm rest, adjusting electric servo lever control

The arm rests for control lever carrier and Comfort Drive Control
(optional equipment) and the control lever carrier can be adjusted
to give the operator an as comfortable operating position as possi-
ble.
Adjusting control lever carrier and arm rest

1 Control lever carrier, vertically
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the control lever carrier verti-
cally to the required position and then tighten the locking knob.
2 Control lever carrier, longitudinally

Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm rest together with the
control lever carrier longitudinally to the required position, then
tighten the locking knob.
1
2 3 Arm rest, sideways
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm rest sideways to the
required position and then tighten the locking knob.
4 Arm rest, vertically

Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm rest vertically to the
3 required position and then tighten the locking knob.
4
1030436
Adjusting arm rest for comfort drive control (CDC)

5 Longitudinal
Loosen the locking knob and adjust longitudinally to the required
position, then tighten the locking knob.
6 Sideways
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm rest sideways to the
5 required position and then tighten the locking knob.
7 Vertically
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm rest vertically to the
required position and then tighten the locking knob.
1027613
Other controls
82 Controls
14 Emergency stop, engine (optional equipment)

NOTE! When the emergency stop is activated, the following
steps 13 always take place. Step 4 only takes place if fire is
detected.
C The following takes place when the machine is operated, the park-
ing brake is released, the system detects fire, and you activate the
B emergency stop (C):
1 The engine is stopped automatically
2 The main electric power is turned off
A 3 The parking brake is applied
4 The sprinkler system is activated (only when fire is detected)
(Fire suppression system, optional equipment).
NOTE! Flashing hazard lights can be activated to bring atten-
1044230 tion to the situation.
A Control panel
B Plastic cover
C Emergency stop
1043940
In case of fire, activate the emergency

stop
Other controls
Operator comfort 83
Operator comfort
Operator's seat
The operator's seat meets the standards according to EN ISO
7096:2000. In short this means that the seat is designed to mini-
mise, in the best possible way, the whole body vibrations to which
the operator is exposed while operating the machine. The size of
the vibrations depends on different factors, many of which are not
related to the construction of the machine, such as ground condi-
tions, speed and operating techniques. Note the following:
Adjust the seat according to the operator's weight and height.
Keep the ground on the work site in good condition
Choose the correct operating technique and speed for the ex-
isting circumstances.
Correctly adjusted operator seat increases operator comfort and
safety. Incorrectly adjusted seat may lead to injuries. The adjust-
ments that should be made are:
A Back-rest inclination
B Lumbar support
C Inclination and raising/lowering seat
D Operator weight
E Longitudinal (leg room)
(The controls for the different adjustments may vary depending on
seat model.)
The mounting bracket for the operator seat has several holes for
attaching the seat. Thereby the operator seat can be moved on the
attaching bracket, thus providing further adjustment possibilities
longitudinally.
If the operator's seat has to be replaced, then the new seat must
be tested according to ISO 7096, which means that the seat man-
ufacturer has designed and adapted the seat's vibration-damping
properties to the machine type in which it is to be installed.
It is forbidden to change to a new seat that does not have the
correct damping capacity.
Moving the operator seat should be carried out by a workshop au-
thorised by Volvo CE.
NOTE! Do not adjust the seat while the machine is moving.
For lubricating operator's seat, see page 196.
Other controls
84 Operator comfort
Mechanical seat
180
0 90 2
70
14
20 110
KG
50
100
260
LBS
1
4 30
C D
B
F
KG
KG
LBS
KG
E LBS
KG LBS
LBS
L66340A
A L66341A
A Back-rest inclination
Pull the handle upward and adjust to the required inclination.
B Lumbar support
Turn the knob to the required setting (hard/soft).
C Height and inclination
Pull the handles upward to raise and downward to lower the rear and front end of the seat.
Never adjust the height of the seat with the weight adjusting wheel
D Adjusting for weight
Adjust the seat according to the relevant weight with the adjusting wheel. While sitting in the seat try to adjust so
that the upward and downward movement ranges are equally distributed. Should not be used for adjusting
height.
E Longitudinal (leg room)
Pull the bar upward and push the seat (forward/rearward).
F Electrically heated (optional equipment)
When electric seat heating is turned on, a thermostat controls when heating is activated and deactivated. Heat-
ing is activated at 14 ±3 °C (5263 °F) and deactivated at 25 ±3 °C (7283 °F).
Air-suspended seat
The adjustments are carried out in the same way as for the me-
chanical seat, except for lumbar support and weight adjustments.
B Adjusting lumbar support
Using the buttons it is possible to fill and empty the upper and
lower lumbar supports separately as required.
D Adjusting for weight
By pressing the button marked + for filling and for emptying,
L66529A the seat suspension can be adjusted according to the relevant
operator weight.
D B
While sitting in the seat try to adjust so that the upward and
downward movement ranges are equally distributed. Should not
be used for adjusting height.
Air-suspended seat (heavy-duty)

The operator's seat meets the standards according to EN ISO
7096:2000. In short this means that the seat is designed to mini-
mise, in the best possible way, the whole body vibrations to which
the operator is exposed while operating the machine. The size of
the vibrations depends on different factors, many of which are not
related to the construction of the machine, such as ground condi-
tions, speed and operating techniques. Note the following:
Adjust the seat according to the operator's weight and height.
Keep the ground on the work site in good condition
Choose the correct operating technique and speed for the ex-
isting circumstances.
The mounting bracket for the operator seat has several holes for
attaching the seat. Thereby the operator seat can be moved on the
attaching bracket, thus providing further adjustment possibilities
longitudinally.
Moving the operator seat should be carried out by a workshop au-
thorised by Volvo CE.
Correctly adjusted operator seat increases operator comfort and
safety. Incorrectly adjusted seat may lead to injuries. The adjust-
ments which should be carried out are shown below.
NOTE! Do not adjust the seat while the machine is moving.
Other controls
Operator comfort 85
A Switch, heated seat

When electric seat heating is turned on, a thermostat controls
when heating is activated and deactivated. Heating is activated at
14 ±3 °C (5263 °F) and deactivated at 25 ±3 °C (7283 °F).
B Back-rest inclination
Pull the handle upward and adjust the backrest to the required
A inclination.
C Inclining/raising, front end of seat
G B Lift the handle and adjust inclination/height of the front end of
the seat.
D Inclining/raising, rear end of seat
Lift the handle and adjust inclination/height of the rear end of the
seat.
F C D
E 1027663 E Adjusting for weight
By pressing in the button for filling and pulling out the button for
emptying, the seat suspension can be adjusted according to the
relevant operator weight.
While sitting in the seat try to adjust so that the upward and
downward movement ranges are equally distributed.
Should not be used for adjusting height.
F Longitudinal
Lift the handle upward and adjust the seat longitudinally.
G Lumbar support
The lumbar support is adjusted manually with an air pump.
The air pump together with valve is positioned on the right side
of the seat.
Seat belt
The seatbelt supplements the safety design of the cab, or the can-
opy, and must be used to prevent the operator from being ejected
from the cab, if the machine should turn over. A fastened seatbelt
also helps the operator to maintain control of the machine if it
should pitch or rock violently or operate in other rough conditions.
The seatbelt with associated parts must be inspected at regular
intervals. Replace the entire seatbelt immediately if it is worn,
has loose stitching, or if buckles or the seatbelt roller does not
work.
Replace the seatbelt if the machine has been involved in an ac-
cident where the belt has been subjected to high strain or load-
ing.
Changes to the belt or its mountings must never be made.
The seat belt is intended for one grown up person only.
Keep the belt rolled-up when not in use.
Only clean with warm water, not soap or cleaners. Allow the belt to
dry while it is fully pulled out, before rolling it up. Make sure the belt
is installed in a correct way.
Other controls
86 Operator comfort
Climate control system
1 2
1
1015939
1027038
4
1 Air nozzles, front

2 Panel, climate control system
3 Air nozzles, rear
4 Temperature sensor for cab climate
NOTE! Make sure that the space in front of the temperature

sensor is clear. Do not point an air nozzle directly at the tem-
perature sensor.
Other controls
Operator comfort 87
2 3 4 5
26
24
22
1 20
18
1020417
1 Air conditioning
3 Fan control
1 Air conditioning (optional equipment)

Press in the switch to switch on the air conditioning.
The control lamp in the switch shows that the function is switched
on.
1026312
1 Air conditioning If the control lamp starts to flash, the air conditioning has become
turned off.
The cause may be clogged condenser, see page 198.
NOTE! (The switch is installed on machines without this op-
tional equipment, but does then not have this function.)

(interval heating is optional equipment)
Cab ventilation / interval heating takes place with the aid of the cab
1026313
fan at the same time as the engine is turned off and the ignition key
is in position 0.
Works even when the ignition key has been removed from the ig-
nition switch.
The battery disconnect switch must be switched on.
Activation:
Press in switch (2) to activate the cab ventilation / interval heating.
Activation can be done max. 1 minute before, or max. 15 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to position 0, thus turning off the en-
gine.
The control lamp in the switch is alight and shows that the function
is active.
Warm outdoor climate, cab ventilation:

The cab is ventilated while the machine is parked.
Fan speed at position AUT is recommended.
The time is max. 2 hours.
Other controls
88 Operator comfort
Cold outdoor climate, interval heating (optional equipment):

The engine coolant is circulated and thereby provides the cab with
heating.
The duration of the interval heating is as long as the temperature
of the coolant is sufficiently high or up to 1 hour.
Fan speed at position AUT is recommended.
The temperature is adjustable with the temperature control.
Deactivation is done or takes place:

With switch (2).
When the time has elapsed.
When the engine is started.
3 Fan control
Position 0 = fan turned off.
Position AUT = automatic control, stepless fan speed.
Marked area = manual setting, fixed positions for fan speed.
1026309
NOTE! If the cab door is opened at the same time as the fan
3 Fan control control is in position AUT, the fan speed will automatically be
lowered in certain cases.
26
24
Position upward = max. heating, red marking.
22
Position left = selection of required temperature.
20 Position downward = max. cooling, blue marking.
18 1026310

Position AUT = automatic control.
Position left, towards the symbol = maximum air recirculation.
Marked area = mixed, air recirculation ambient air.
Position right, towards the upper symbol = maximum ambient air.
1026311
Position right = defroster, ventilation nozzles at the windows open
5 Air distribution control and directed towards the windows.
B Ventilation nozzles
A Open the ventilation nozzles and adjust the direction of the air to
obtain the best possible air distribution.
C L68569A
A Open
B Closed
C Air flow direction
Other controls
Operator comfort 89
Adjusting heating and ventilation

The instructions below are basic recommendations. Each operator
should experiment to achieve the best possible working environ-
ment in the cab, i.e. the right temperature without a draught.
For the best temperature control in the cab try to have as many
nozzles as possible open.
Maximum recirculation set with the air distribution control

May be used as a setting for reducing the intake of bad-smelling
air. This also reduces the accumulation of dust in the cab ventila-
tion filters.
If the windows mist up, turn the control to Maximum ambient air.
When required check and clean or replace the cab ventilation fil-
ters, see page 195.
How to achieve ...

... comfortable working temperature:
All nozzles fully open.
During warm outdoor climate air conditioning switched on.
Fan control in position AUT.
Temperature control set to required temperature.
Air distribution control in position AUT.
... demisting all windows:

The front nozzles directed towards the windscreen.
Floor nozzles under instrument panel closed.
The rear nozzles should be directed towards the rear window/
side window.
The air distribution control in defroster position, which provides:
Maximum ambient air.
Maximum heating.
Maximum cooling, if the machine is equipped with air condition-
ing.
Highest fan speed.
When the required effect has been reached and the air distribution
control is turned back to the required position, the climate control
system returns to selected temperature and selected fan speed.
Open the floor nozzles.
Provide for good ventilation

Do not operate the machine for long periods without ventila-
tion or with the cab fully closed without having the fan turned
on.
Poorly ventilated air can cause tiredness (lack of oxygen).
Other controls
90 Operator comfort
Rear vision system, screen, colour

The rear vision camera, together with the visual display unit in the
cab provide the operator with a better view rearwards.
The lens on the rear vision camera should be cleaned with a damp
rag when required.
1 SB/ON.
On: The screen is on all the time when the start key is in oper-
ating position.
SB: The screen is only on when the gear selector is in reverse
position. The distance indicator is shown. This position is rec-
ommended as the normal position in order not to disturb when
1 2 operating forwards.
2 LED Lit when the screen is on. Halved light intensity (bright-
3 ness) when the screen is in standby mode.
4 5 1044899
3 CAM-SELECT. Used to adjust the camera.
6
The menu with different adjustments is shown if the button is
held in approx. 2 seconds on the condition that the gear selec-
tor is not in reverse.
Press the button again to access the desired adjustment.
Hold in the button approx. 2 seconds to close the menu. It is
also closed automatically after 10 seconds.
4 Used to adjust the volume under "VOICE" on the "INPUT"-
menu. The buttons are also used to scroll in the menu.
5 DIM. Used to adjust light intensity (brightness) of the screen.
6 NOR/BLC. A sensor senses the light around the camera and
automatically adjusts the light intensity (brightness) on the
screen. Do not cover over the sensor.

(Older version)
rag when required.
1 SB / ON. With the button pressed in to the "ON" position,
the monitor is on all the time, when the ignition key is in
running position. With the button in "SB" position, the
monitor will only be on when the gear selector is in re-
verse. At the same time the distance indicator is shown.
This is recommended as the normal position in order not
8 to disturb when operating forwards.
7 2 Switches between rear vision camera and external signal,
6 e.g. video.
5 3 Light control. Adjustment for brighter or darker image.
4 4 Switches between camera one and camera two, if such a
3 camera is installed.
5 Contrast. Adjustment for weaker or stronger image.
2 6 Exposure button. Improves the image in strong sun light
1010814
1 or when it is dark. The button must be kept pressed in.
Therefore, do not make any adjustments while operating.
7 Colour. Adjusting colour.
8 Light sensor. The sensor registers the brightness around
the monitor and adjusts the light intensity automatically for
best possible image. Do not cover over the sensor.
Other controls
Operator comfort 91
Rear vision system, screen, black/white

(Older version)
rag when required.
1 On and Off button. When the button is pressed in, a rearward
view is shown on the display unit provided that the ignition key
is in position 1 (running position).
2 Contrast. Adjustment for weaker or stronger image.
3 Light control. Adjustment for brighter or darker image.
4 Light sensor.
5 Exposure button. Improves the image in strong sun light or
when it is dark. The button must be kept pressed in. Therefore,
6 do not make any adjustments while operating.
5 4
32 L69024A
6 Automatic light control takes place if the button is not
1 pressed in. If the button is pressed in, the light control has a
fixed setting.
Other controls
92
Operating instructions
93
This chapter contains rules which must be followed to make work-
ing with the machine safe. However, these rules do not relieve the
operator from following laws or other national regulations for traffic
safety, industrial safety and labour welfare.
To avoid the risk of accidents, alertness, judgement and respect for
applicable safety regulations is a condition.
Running-in instructions
During the first 100 hours, the machine should be operated with
particularly great care. During the running-in period it is important
to check oil and fluid levels often.
Wheel bolts should be check-tightened after 8 hours operation,
see page 194.
Engine protection - Software

The function informs the operator and limits the engine speed and
torque and also the travelling speed of the machine in order to pre-
vent any engine damage. Engine shutdown does not take place
until the speed has dropped to below 2 km/h (1.2 mph). This
makes it possible always to be able to move the machine away
from dangerous situations before engine shutdown takes place.
The function is monitored by the engine control unit E-ECU and
depending on which component is causing the alarm any of the fol-
lowing functions will be activated:
reduction of engine torque
limiting engine speed
limiting travelling speed of machine
engine shutdown
Auto engine shut-off

The equipment is standard Fire Suppression System.
Engine shutoff takes place after a predetermined time.
The time is set with VCADS Pro service tool.
The following conditions are required for engine shut-off:
The machine is stationary
The engine is running at low idling
The gear selector is in neutral position
The hand-throttle is not actuated
When the conditions have been met and there is one minute left of
the predetermined time, a message is shown on the display unit.
Engine shut-off can then be interrupted by activating the accelera-
tor pedal, hand throttle, or gear selector.
When automatic engine shut-off has taken place:

The parking brake is applied
The ignition key remains in position 1, running position
Lights or other connected current consuming devices remain con-
nected.
94 Visibility
Visibility
WARNING!
Some attachments and equipment may affect the operator's
visibility. Pay attention to dead angles, where there is no
visibility, when operating on work sites and on public
roads. If needed, get help from a signal man.
The following information applies to machines delivered to

countries within the EU and may also apply to machines de-
livered to other countries outside the EU.
It may be impossible to obtain visibility to all areas around the ma-
chine. Optional devices and equipment such as warning systems,
mirrors, back-up alarm, and monitoring cameras (CCTV), etc.,
may be used to obtain acceptable visibility.
NOTE! Some parts of the basic machine may restrict visibility,
e.g., the cab's pillars and frames, exhaust pipe, engine hood,
as well as optional equipment such as buckets, pallet forks,
grapples, etc. The load that is handled with these attachments
may also restrict visibility.
To minimize risks caused by restricted visibility, the management
shall establish rules and procedures for the work site. For exam-
ple:
Make sure that operators and persons on the site have re-
ceived thorough safety instructions.
Conduct training for operators and staff on the site.
Control traffic flow for machines and other vehicles.
Restrict the machine's work area.
Use a signal man to assist the operator. Use hand signals ac-
cording to the signal diagram, see page 156.
Make available equipment for two-way communication when
needed.
Make sure that persons on the site communicate with the oper-
ator before approaching the machine.
Restrictions for maximum permitted speed as well as for re-
versing the machine over long distances.
Visibility standards to meet EU's machine directive
The standard ISO 5006 "Earthmoving machinery Operators
field of view" deals with the operator's visibility around the ma-
chine and is intended to be used to measure and evaluate vis-
ibility. Conforming to this standard is a requirement in EU-
countries and offers improved visibility around the machine.
The machine is tested according to methods and criteria ac-
cording to this standard. The method used to evaluate visibility
cannot include all aspects concerning the operator's visibility,
but gives information to determine if optional equipment for in-
direct visibility is necessary, e.g., warning systems.
The test was performed on a stationary machine without load,
with standard equipment and standard attachment, and with
the bucket in carry position.
Visibility 95
ISO 14401 "Earthmoving machinery - Field of vision of surveil-

lance and rear-view mirrors".
ISO 16001 "Earthmoving machinery - Hazard detection sys-
tems and visual aids - Performance requirements and tests"
If the machine is modified or retrofitted with other equipment or at-
tachments, which result in reduced visibility, it shall be tested again
according to ISO 5006, ISO 14401, and ISO 16001, and provided
with optional visibility-enhancing equipment as needed.
Actions before and during operation
Walk around the machine and check that there are no obsta-
cles next to the machine.
Check that mirrors and other visibility-enhancing equipment is
in good condition, clean, and properly adjusted.
Check that the horn, back-up warning signal, and the rotating
beacon (optional equipment) work correctly.
Check if the management has established rules and proce-
dures for the work site.
Always keep a look-out and pay attention to the area around
the machine so that any obstacles can be identified.
Prevent persons from entering or remaining in the danger area,
i.e. the area around the machine and at least 7 m (23 ft) beyond
the maximum reach of the attachment. The operator may allow
a person to remain in the danger area, but should then observe
caution and operate the machine only when the person is visi-
The danger area around an operating machine ble or has given clear indications of where he or she is.
forms a circle with a radius of least 7 m (23 ft).
96 Safety rules when operating
Safety rules when operating

Operator duties
WARNING!
No unauthorized personnel shall be in the machine's work
area. Pay attention in all directions to avoid running over
other personnel or running in to objects. Do not touch con-
trol levers or switches when starting. Sound the horn
before using the machine.
The machine operator must operate the machine in such a way
that the risk of accidents is minimised both for the operator, oth-
er road users and persons present at the work site.
The machine operator must be thoroughly familiar with how to
operate and maintain the machine and should preferably un-
dergo required training on the machine.
The machine operator must follow the rules and recommenda-
tions given in the Operator's Manual, but also pay attention to
any statutory and national regulations or specific requirements
or risks that apply at the work site.
The machine operator must be thoroughly rested and must
never operate the machine under the influence of alcohol, med-
icine or other drugs.
The machine operator is responsible for the load of the ma-
chine both when travelling on public roads as well as when
working on site.
There must be no risk of the load falling off while operating.
Refuse to take a load which is an obvious safety risk.
Respect the rated load capacity of the machine. Note the effect
of varying distances to the centre of gravity and the effect of ad-
ditional units.
The machine operator must be in charge of the working area of
the machine.
The danger area around an operating machine Prevent persons from walking or standing under raised lifting
forms a circle with a radius of least 7 m (23 ft). arms, unless they have been made safe or supported.
Prevent persons from entering or remaining in the danger area,
i.e. the area around the machine and at least 7 m (23 ft) beyond
the maximum reach of the attachment. The operator may allow
a person to remain in the danger area, but should then observe
caution and operate the machine only when the person is visi-
ble or has given clear indications of where he or she is.
The machine operator is responsible for the machine not being
used to transport or lift persons, unless it is equipped and ap-
proved for this purpose. Contact a dealer for more information.
Accidents
WARNING!
Only the operator, sitting in the operator's seat, may be in
the cab during operation. All other personnel must remain a
safe distance from the machine.
Accidents and also incidents should be reported to the site
management immediately.
If possible leave the machine in position.
Only take necessary action so as to reduce the effect of dam-
age, especially personal injuries. Avoid action which may make
an investigation more difficult.
In case of an accident, take active part in actions included in
planned accident preparedness or follow other regulations.
Wait for further instructions from the site management.
Safety rules when operating 97
Machine operator safety

Always use the seatbelt.
Always sit in the operator's seat with the seatbelt fastened
when starting the machine (engine) and when operating levers
and switches.
Check that the seatbelt is not worn, see page 85.
The machine must be operational, i.e. faults which can cause
accidents must be rectified.
Suitable clothing for safe handling and a hard hat should be
worn.
A loose mobile telephone must not be used, as it may interfere
with important electronics. The mobile telephone must be con-
nected to the electrical system of the machine and have a fixed
external aerial installed according to the instructions of the
manufacturer.
Keep your hands away from areas where there is a risk of
crushing, e.g. covers, door and window.
Use steps and handholds when entering or leaving the ma-
L66347A chine. Use the three-point grip, i.e. two hands and one foot or
two feet and one hand. Always face the machine do not jump!
The door must be closed during work and transport operations.
The vibration (shaking) which arises when operating may be
harmful to the operator. Reduce this by:
adjusting the seat and tightening the seal belt.
picking the smoothest operating surface for the machine
(levelling the surface when necessary).
adapting the speed.
The cab is for the protection of the machine operator and it
meets the requirements for Roll Over Protective Structures ac-
cording to the testing standard "ROPS". Therefore, hold firmly
onto the steering wheel if the machine should roll over Do not
jump!
The cab is also designed to meet the requirements for falling
objects, the weight of which agrees with testing methods ac-
cording to "FOPS".
Only walk and stand on surfaces which have slip protection.
Do not enter or leave the machine during a thunderstorm.
If you are outside the machine, keep a good distance
away from the machine until the thunderstorm has
passed.
If you are inside the cab, stay there with the machine sta-
1030480 tionary until the thunderstorm has passed. Do not touch
any controls or anything made of metal.
(Principle diagram)
Check that the attachment is properly attached and locked.
Stepping surfaces
The cab has two emergency exits, the door and the right side
window.
98 Safety rules when operating
Operating (working) on a public road

Road signs, traffic restricting arrangements and other safety
devices, which may be required when considering traffic speed
and intensity or other local conditions, must be used.
When moving a machine with a suspended load, special atten-
tion must be observed. When required, a signal man must be
used.
Rotating warning beacon may be used:
on vehicle during road maintenance work, e.g. snow
clearing.
on attached or connected implement, which is wider than
the vehicle itself.
when the vehicle constitutes a hindrance or danger to oth-
er traffic
when working on or by the side of the roadway.
Travelling on public road

As a machine operator you are considered to be a road user
and therefore required to know and follow local regulations and
national traffic regulations.
It is important to bear in mind that the machine, in comparison
with the rest of the traffic, is a slow moving and wide vehicle,
which may cause obstruction. Bear this in mind and pay atten-
tion to the traffic behind you. Facilitate overtaking.
The use of SMV-plate (Slow Moving Vehicle) is recommended.
It should be placed in a position at the rear on the machine
1003922
where it is clearly seen, not inside the rear window or any other
window. It should be positioned at a height of 0.61.8 m (26 ft)
above the ground, measured from the lower edge of the plate.
The attachment should be empty, lowered to the carry position
(3040 cm = 1216 inches above the ground) and tilted fully
backward. The front end of the material handling arm must be
marked with a red flag.
Lock the control levers with the control lever lockout.
L66358A
All working lamps and any rotating warning beacon should be
switched off.
SMV-plate
Hazard flashers must not be used.
Attachments and buckets which obscure the vision must not be
used.
Make sure that large attachments/buckets do not obscure the
travelling lights. According to traffic regulations the area in front
of the machine must be sufficiently illuminated and visible.
Additional attachments such as buckets, spades and iron bars
must be thoroughly secured with tensioning straps or chains.
If a trailer is to be pulled behind the machine, follow national
laws and regulations, e.g. regarding requirements as to brakes,
steering, lights, approved towing devices and the direction of
forces permitted on the towing devices on both machine and
trailer.
Safety rules when operating 99
Safety rules in case of fire

If your own safety is not immediately compromised, take the fol-
lowing actions.
In case of fire on the work site

1 If possible, move the machine away from the hazardous area.
2 Lower the attachment to the ground.
3 Turn off the engine by turning the start key counter-clockwise
or by pressing in the emergency stop (optional equipment) in
the cab.
4 Leave the cab.
5 Turn off the main electric power with the battery disconnector
inside of the radiator casing.
6 If possible, take active part in putting out the fire and call the fire
department if needed.
In case of fire in the machine

If the machine is being operated:
1 If possible, park in a fireproof location.
3 Turn off the engine by turning the start key counter-clockwise
or by pressing in the emergency stop (optional equipment) in
the cab.
4 Leave the cab.
5 If possible, turn off the main electric power with the battery dis-
connector inside of the radiator casing.
6 When needed, continue putting out the fire with a handheld fire
extinguisher. Be ready with the handheld fire extinguisher since
there may still be fire deep inside the machine which could
reignite other parts.
7 Call the fire department if required.
In case of fire in machine with Fire Suppression System (op-

tional equipment)
If the machine is operated (operator-dependent activation of sprin-
kler system):
1 If possible, park in a fireproof location.
2 Turn off the engine with the emergency stop (optional equip-
ment) in the cab or by turning the start key counter-clockwise.
NOTE! The sprinkler system is activated if fire is detected.
3 Leave the cab.
NOTE! It is also possible to activate the sprinkler system with
the manual activation button (outside the cab), see page 9.
4 If possible, turn off the main electric power with the battery dis-
connector inside of the radiator casing.
5 When needed, continue putting out the fire with a handheld fire
extinguisher. Be ready with the handheld fire extinguisher since
there may still be fire deep inside the machine which could
reignite other parts.
6 Call the fire department if required.
NOTE! If the machine is not operated or if the parking brake is
applied, the sprinkler system is activated automatically.
100 Actions before operating
Actions before operating
WARNING!
When travelling on a public road, it is prohibited to have the
Comfort Drive Control (CDC) activated use the steering
wheel
1 Carry out daily service, see page 211.
2 Clean/scrape the windows.
3 Clean and adjust mirrors and cameras.
4 Check that there are no faulty/loose parts or leaks which can
cause damage.
5 Check that the battery disconnect switch is switched on.
6 Check that the frame joint lock has been disconnected.
7 Check that the wheels are not blocked.
8 Check that engine and access covers are closed and that the
radiator casing is closed and secured.
9 Check that there are no persons in the vicinity of the machine,
see page 96.
10 Adjust the operator seat (see page 83) and the steering wheel
(see page 72).
11 Fasten the seatbelt.
12 Check that there is sufficient fuel in the tank.
After operating
Fill the fuel tank, as this will counteract the formation of conden-
sation water.
Make sure that there is enough anti-freeze in the cooling sys-
tem (see page 181) and in the washer fluid at temperatures be-
low 0 °C (32 °F).
Starting engine 101
Starting engine
WARNING!
The engine must only be stared with the ignition switch in
the cab.
If the machine is equipped with anti-theft device, see page 55.

1 Place the gear selector to neutral.
2 Turn the key in the ignition switch to running position (1) so that
a system test can take place, the duration of which is 45 sec-
1026348 onds.
3 At the same time check that all lamps light up and that the
gauges indicate.
4 Turn the ignition key to starting position (2). If the engine does
not start, turn the key back to the "0" position, before making a
new starting attempt.
5 Check that all control and warning lamps are extinguished.
6 Check that the attachment is securely fastened to the machine
by pressing it against the ground.
7 Sound the horn.
8 Release the parking brake.
9 Select gear position and increase the engine speed.
Turbocharger
The turbocharger is lubricated and cooled through the engine lu-
brication system.
L66718A
Important for the function of the turbocharger is that:
Air Lubricating oilExhaust lubrication and cooling is safeguarded by:
not racing the engine immediately after it has been start-
ed.
allow the engine to run at low idle for at least 30 seconds
before it is turned off.
D in case of an encased (heat-insulated) type turbocharger
A C and manifold, it is important that the engine, after it has
been working hard, is allowed to run at low idle for at least
B two minutes before it is turned off.
engine oil is changed and oil filters are replaced at prescribed
intervals.
L67289A
the air cleaner is serviced regularly and that the exhaust sys-
A Exhaust inlet tem and lubricating oil lines do not leak.
B To exhaust system
In case jarring noises can be heard, or if the turbocharger vibrates,
C Air inlet it must be reconditioned or replaced immediately.
D Compressed air
Any work on the turbocharger should be carried out by a
workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
102 Starting engine
Starting engine in cold weather

The preheating function is controlled by the engine ECU.
1 Turn the ignition key to running position (1).
WARNING! 2 If there is a need of heating, the function will be activated auto-
matically.
Starting gas such as ether, etc., may
cause an explosion in the engine's 3 A symbol lights up on the display unit that shows that the pre-
inlet manifold. Contact a workshop heating is connected, see page 29.
authorised by Volvo CE if the engine 4 When the symbol is extinguished, the engine can be started by
does not start. turning the ignition key to starting position (2).
Leave the engine running at low idle for 60 seconds so that the
oil in the engine, transmission, hydraulic system and axles has
warmed up and become sufficiently fluid to provide proper lu-
brication.
To race the engine immediately after it has been started may
also endanger the lubrication and cooling of the turbocharger
with great risk of bearing seizure as a consequence.
Starting with booster batteries
WARNING!
Batteries may explode if a fully charged battery is con-
nected to a completely discharged battery (due to the cur-
rent surge) or a frozen battery. Risk of personal injuries.
Check that the booster batteries or any other power source

has the same voltage as the ordinary batteries.
1 Move the gear selector to neutral.
2 Apply the parking brake.
D 3 Connect one of the jump leads from (+) on the booster battery,
to (+) on the battery, which is connected nearest to the starter
motor.
C 4 Connect the other jump lead from () on the booster battery, to
for example the lifting eye on the cylinder head.
B B 5 Make sure that the battery disconnect switch is switched on.
6 Start the engine with the start key in the cab.
1027351
A A
WARNING!
(Principle diagram) Do not under any circumstances disconnect the leads from
the ordinary batteries.
A Booster batteries
B Ordinary batteries 7 Leave the batteries connected for 510 minutes after starting
C Cylinder block the engine.
D Starter motor 8 If the ordinary batteries are greatly discharged, it is possible
that the alternator will not be able to provide any charging cur-
rent. Therefore, switch on a number of current consuming de-
vices, e.g. travel lights, working lights and preheating, in order
to get the charging going.
9 First remove the jump lead between (), e.g. the lifting eye on
the cylinder head and () on the booster battery.
10 Then remove the jump lead between (+) on the battery, which
is nearest to the starter motor and (+) on the booster battery.
11 Re-install the insulating caps on the battery terminals.
Gear shifting 103
Gear shifting
Manual gear shifting
Select a suitable gear by turning the gear selector control to the
required gear position and then select travelling direction for-
ward or rearward.
1027043
Directional gear
WARNING!
The gear selector may never be moved to neutral when
operating downhill since this results in a complete loss of
engine braking capacity.
1027044
WARNING!
Never leave the machine with the selector in forward or
reverse while the engine is running there is a risk that the
machine may begin to move.
Selector in position N = Neutral

Selector in position F = Operating forward
Selector in position R = Operating rearward
When changing from forward to reverse or vice versa, the speed

of the machine and of the engine should be reduced as much as
possible, particularly if the machine is working on firm ground.
Shifting between forward and reverse may only take place in 1st
and 2nd gear.
104 Gear shifting
Automatic shifting (APS)

(Gear selector in speed gear position 3 or 4)
The shift modulation allows the machine operator to select differ-
ent automatic shifting programmes (modes) depending on the op-
erating conditions.
Operating in the APS position

Turn the gear selector control to gear position 3 or 4.
Select operating programme with the mode selector (position
AUTO is recommended)
1020388
Select directional gear.
Mode selector
Accelerate and the machine will start in 2nd gear (basic gear).
If the machine is already moving, it will engage 3rd gear auto-
matically.
Up- and downshifts are made between 2nd 3rd 4th gears
forward, and between 2nd 3rd 4th gears rearwards.
When the direction of travel has been changed the machine will
start off in 2nd gear.
Downshifting to 1st gear, see "Fully automatic downshifting"
page 57 or "Kick-down function" on page 105.
Positions L and M
Position "L" means that shifting will take place at low engine
speeds.
Position "M" means that shifting will take place at slightly higher
engine speeds.
With the accelerator fully depressed, upshifting takes place ac-
cording to position "H".
The best utilisation is obtained if the accelerator is not de-
pressed fully, as the difference in upshifting speed between the
different modes (L, M and H) will be distinct.
Results in lower fuel consumption and lower noise level.
Position H
The machine does not shift until higher engine and travelling
speeds have been reached.
Preferably used in cases where the machine changes gear
when operating uphill or when the rolling resistance is great.
Position AUT
The machine chooses APS-program according to the opera-
tor's operating method.
Mode 1023178
(service mode)
After starting gear shifting is done manually, see page 103.
The machine starts and operates in the selected gear position. Up-
shifts and downshifts on the move are controlled manually.
NOTE! Service mode shall only be used during service or for
troubleshooting.
Gear shifting 105
Kick-down function
Kick-down is obtained, if the mode selector is within the automatic
range, the gear selector control is in either of positions 2, 3, or 4
A and either of the kick-down buttons is actuated.
When the kick-down button is pressed, 1st gear will be en-
gaged if the travelling speed already is below 8 km/h (5.0 mph)
or if the speed drops below 8 km/h (5.0 mph) within 8 seconds
after the button was depressed.
When 1st gear has been engaged the buzzer will give off one
short pip.
1st gear will remain engaged unless the kick-down function
switch is actuated a second time or if the engine speed be-
comes extremely high (when the switch is actuated a second
time, 2nd gear will be engaged).
If the direction of travel is changed, the machine will start off in
2nd gear, provided automatic shifting is selected.
NOTE! If the machine, as optional extra, is equipped with lever

steering (CDC) the kick-down function is also available on the
1027069 arm rest.
A Kick-down button, control lever carrier
Engine braking / downshifting

With the aid of the button for engine braking / downshifting it is pos-
A sible to obtain an immediate downshift one or two steps or to pre-
vent unwanted upshifting. In this way the warming up of the axle
oil is reduced.
One press of the button at higher speeds, will result in a down-
shifting from 4th to 3rd gear.
One further press of the button at a lower speed, will result in a
downshifting to 2nd gear.
If the switch is kept in the pressed-in position, upshifting to the
next higher gear is prevented, which can be used when operat-
ing downhill or when approaching a vehicle which is to be load-
ed.
NOTE! If certain critical rotational speeds and travelling
speeds are exceeded, upshifting takes place.
Under these circumstances, lower the travelling speed, or se-
lect a higher gear to reduce the engine speed.
1027070
A Engine braking / downshifting

106 Gear shifting
Kick-down function, electric servo

Kick-down is obtained, if the gear selector control is in position 2,
3 or 4 and either of the kick-down buttons is actuated.
1 When the kick-down button is pressed, 1st gear will be en-
gaged, if the travelling speed already is below 8 km/h (5.0 mph)
or if the speed drops below 8 km/h (5.0 mph) within 10 seconds
after the button was depressed.
When 1st gear has been engaged the buzzer will give off one
short pip.
1st gear will remain engaged unless the kick-down function
switch is actuated a second time or if the engine speed be-
comes extremely high (when the switch is actuated a second
time, 2nd gear will be engaged).
If the direction of travel is changed, the machine will start off in
2nd gear, provided automatic shifting is selected.
NOTE! If the machine, as optional extra, is equipped with lever

1030435 steering (CDC) the kick-down function is also available on the
arm rest.
1 Kick-down
Engine braking/downshifting, electric servo

2 (optional equipment)
With the aid of the button for engine braking / downshifting it is pos-
sible to obtain an immediate downshift one or two steps or to pre-
vent unwanted upshifting. In this way the warming up of the axle
oil is reduced.
One press of the button at higher speeds, will result in a down-
shifting from 4th to 3rd gear.
One further press of the button at a lower speed, will result in a
downshifting to 2nd gear.
If the switch is kept in the pressed-in position, upshifting to the
next higher gear is prevented, which can be used when operat-
ing downhill or when approaching a vehicle which is to be load-
ed.
NOTE! If certain critical rotational speeds and travelling
1030434 speeds are exceeded, upshifting takes place.
If the engine or transmission speed become too high, the red
central warning lamp flashes, the buzzer sounds and alarm text
2 Engine braking / downshifting is shown on the display unit.
Under these circumstances, lower the travelling speed, or se-
lect a higher gear to reduce the engine speed.
Steering 107
Steering
The machine has articulated frame steering, which is hydrostati-
cally controlled.
Comfort Drive Control, CDC (optional equipment)

IMPORTANT! When operating in areas with risk of electro-
magnetic fields, EMF, the Comfort Drive Control (CDC) shall
1027909
always be deactivated, see page 129.

15011966
By alternating between using Comfort Drive Control and steering

wheel steering the operator will have a more varied pattern of
movement.
The system consists of a folding arm rest where three functions
are concentrated, i.e. steering, forward/reverse and kick-down
function. The system is activated with the button on the arm rest
(see the next page). The arm rest must be lowered in order to be
able to activate the function.
Comfort Drive Control (CDC) is deactivated by raising the arm rest.
For adjustment of arm rest for comfort drive control, see page 80.
1049023
The CDC-function is also deactivated when the gear selector is
Comfort Drive Control (CDC) is deactivated by moved from neutral position.
raising the armrest or by moving the gear se-
lector from neutral position.
The control light on the instrument panel is turned on when Com-
fort Drive Control (CDC) is activated.
The machine's max. speed is limited when Comfort Drive Control
(CDC) is activated.
1021113 WARNING!
Control lamp, comfort drive control Always use the steering wheel when operating on public
roads and on work sites at speeds over 20 km/h (12.4 mph).
When operating on public roads the armrest must always
be raised. It is forbidden to operate with activated lever
steering (Comfort Drive Control, CDC) on public roads.
Small physical effort is required to operate the Comfort Drive Con-

trol. The distance the lever is moved is proportional to the speed
at which the steering system reacts.
The function of the steering wheel always have priority over the
CDC function. This means that if you attempt to steer to the right
with the CDC and to the left with the steering wheel, the machine
will steer in the direction the steering wheel was moved.
11445277
1024716
108 Steering
1 Activating (CDC)
In order to be able to use the steering, forward/reverse and kick-
down functions from the arm rest, the arm rest must be lowered
1021113
and the system activated with button 1.
Control lamp, comfort drive control To make it possible to activate the system, the following steps must
first have been carried out:
The arm rest must be lowered to its lowest position.
NOTE! In certain positions the arm rest must be moved to the
right, in towards the seat in order to reach its lowest position.
The directional gear selector on the arm rest, the ordinary gear
selector control and at the control lever carrier must be in neu-
tral position.
1049023 The engine must be running, but the machine must be station-
Comfort Drive Control (CDC) is deactivated by ary.
raising the armrest or by moving the gear se- When the system is activated, a control lamp on the instrument
lector from neutral position. panel is on.
NOTE! Comfort Drive Control (CDC) is deactivated by raising
the arm rest. Comfort Drive Control (CDC) is also deactivated
1
4 by moving the gear selector from neutral position.
3 2 Steering lever
2 A small physical effort is required to operate the Comfort Drive
Control in either direction and the speed at which the steering sys-
tem reacts is proportional to the distance the lever is moved. The
steering wheel always remains functional.
3 Kick-down button
With the kick-down button pressed in = The machine shifts down
to 1st gear if the gear selector control is in either of positions 2, 3
or 4.
4 Directional gear selector

With the front end of the switch pressed down = Forward drive.
With the rear end of the switch depressed = Reverse drive.
There is a neutral position between the forward and reverse posi-
5 tions.
NOTE! The ordinary gear selector control always has priority,
i.e. if the ordinary gear selector control is actuated, the selec-
tion made from the armrest is cancelled.
6
1030657
5 Adjusting arm rest, sideways
1 Activating CDC Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm rest sideways to the
required position. Then tighten down the locking knob.
2 Steering lever
3 Kick-down button
4 Directional gear selector
6 Adjusting arm rest, vertically
5 Adjusting arm rest, sideways Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm rest vertically to the
6 Adjusting arm rest, vertically required position. Then tighten down the locking knob.
Braking 109
Braking
WARNING!
The transmission disengagement function must not be
used during transport operation.
Brake smoothly. This is particularly important when operating with

a load and on slippery ground. If required during certain opera-
tions, the power transmission can be made to automatically disen-
gage (declutch) when the brakes are applied. Activating this
function is carried out from the keyboard, see page 30.
Engine braking with the aid of the downshift button may be advan-
tageous, particularly when operating downhill. In this way it is pos-
sible to reduce the warming up of the axle oil, see page 105.
Brake test
(Checking service brakes)
WARNING!
A brake test may only be carried out in an area where there
is no risk of accidents.
The brake test is carried out with the aid of computer software,
which measures the average retardation of the machine. The test
can be carried out by the machine operator from the display unit.
Conditions
1 Brake test must only be done within an area where it cannot
cause accidents (risk of being run into from behind etc.).
2 The ground must be level and the surface have good friction.
3 The machine must not be loaded.
4 The travelling speed of the machine must exceed 20 km/h (12.4
mph) when the service brakes are applied.
NOTE! Acceptable values can only be obtained if the test is
carried out on dry asphalt, dry concrete or other similar sur-
faces.
110 Braking
Measuring procedure
Make sure that the prerequisites according to the previous page
are met.
1 Select SERVICE on the keyboard, see page 30.
2 Select the sub menu with the arrow key.
3 Move off (gear selector position A).
When the speed exceeds 20 km/h (12.4 mph) there will be a
short pip signal and the display unit will show "0.0 m/s2 0.00 g",
which means that the speed required for the test has been
reached.
4 If the display unit instead shows "X.X m/s2 X.XX g", the speed
is too low (below 20 km/h = 12.4 mph).
To obtain credible and useful test values, the brake applica-
tion must be carried out:
Without wheels locking or skidding.
With the brakes applied as hard as possible and without letting
up the brake pedal during the test.
Result and evaluation

The test result will be shown on the display unit when the machine
has stopped, i.e. the speed is 0 km/h, and remains on the display
until the speed again exceeds 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
In order to eliminate tests during which the wheels have locked,
brake applications where the retardation exceeds 8 m/s2 (0.82 g)
are not registered.
In this case X.X m/s2 X.XX g will be shown on the display unit.
Minimum value for brake test: 4.75 m/s2 (0.48 g)

If the measured retardation is less than 4.75 m/s2 (0.48 g), a
new test has to be carried out.
If this test too shows a value below 4.75 m/s2 (0.48 g), the brake
system must be checked at a workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
Stopping machine 111
Stopping machine
1 Lower the engine speed.
2 Apply the brakes and when the machine is stationary, move the
gear selector control to neutral.
4 Apply the parking brake after the machine has come to a com-
plete standstill.
IMPORTANT! Run the engine at low idle for at least 30 sec-
onds before stopping it in order to safeguard the lubrication
and cooling of the turbocharger.
In case of encased (heat-insulated) type turbocharger and
manifold, it is important that the engine, after it has been
working hard, is allowed to run at low idling for at least two
minutes before it is turned off.
5 Turn the ignition switch key counter-clockwise so that the con-
trol lamps go out and the engine stops.
WARNING!
Always use the three-point method to climb in to or exit the
cab, that is, two hands and one foot or one hand and both
L64417A feet. Use available steps and handles. Always face the
machine when climbing up on or down from the machine.
Do not jump!
If the operator has to leave the cab with the engine running, care
has to be taken so that the steering wheel is not turned inadvert-
ently as the operator leaves the cab. This applies particularly if the
steering wheel is provided with a knob.
112 Parking
Parking
1 If possible, place the machine on level ground. If this is not pos-
sible, block the wheels so that the machine cannot start rolling.
Lower the attachment against the ground.
2 Check that all switches and controls are in the "off" position or
in neutral.
3 Apply the parking brake after the machine has come to a com-
L68292A
plete standstill.
4 Remove the keys.
5 Turn off the current supply with the battery disconnect switch, if
the machine is to be left unattended for some time.
6 Make sure that there is enough anti-freeze in the cooling sys-
tem (see page 181) and in the washer fluid at temperatures be-
low 0 °C (32 °F).
7 Lock all covers, windows and the door.
Remember that the risk of theft and break-in can be minimised if
one:
removes the ignition key when the machine is left unattended.
locks doors and covers after the end of the working shift.
turns off the current with the battery disconnect switch and re-
moves the handle for the switch.
avoids parking the machine in places with high risk of theft,
break-ins and malicious damage.
removes all valuable items from the cab, e.g. mobile telephone,
computer, radio and bags.
chains the machine to an immobile object.
It is easier to identify stolen machines if PIN number or registration
number is etched onto the windows.
Long-term parking
The temperature may not be below -40 °C (-40 °F) or above
+70 °C (158 °F).
Check that the batteries are fully charged.
Carry out the measures as described above.
Wash the machine and touch up the paint finish to avoid rust-
ing.
Treat exposed parts with anti-rust agent, lubricate the machine
thoroughly and apply grease to unpainted surfaces like lifting
and tilting cylinders etc.
Fill the fuel tank and the hydraulic oil tank to the max. marks.
Cover the exhaust pipe (parking out-of-doors).
Remove the fuse for the voltage converter. Otherwise there is
a risk that the batteries will be discharged.
Check the tyre pressure and protect the tyres against strong
sunlight.
Check after long-term parking

all oil and fluid levels
tension of all belts
air pressure
air cleaner
What to do if the machine gets stuck 113
What to do if the machine gets

stuck
If the machine has got stuck, it is usually best to reverse out. If you
cannot reverse or drive forward, try the following:
1 Engage the differential lock with the foot switch.
2 Select a low gear (1st or 2nd).
3 Reverse and steer the machine fully to the left and then to the
right alternately, etc. (duck's waddle).
If only the front wheels have got stuck proceed in either of the fol-
lowing ways:
1 Lift the front wheels, supporting the machine on the bottom of
a flat bucket and reverse.
2 Steer to the right or to the left, press the bucket against the
ground, lift up the front wheels and steer the other way, raise
the bucket slightly and reverse.
3 Lift up the front wheels using the bucket. Manually fill the holes
under the wheels with branches, pieces of wood or similar and
reverse.
4 If the machine needs to be recovered, see page 114.
You must never engage the differential lock when one of the
wheels is slipping. Lower the engine speed until the wheel
has stopped. Then engage the differential lock.
114 Recovering/towing
Recovering/towing
WARNING!
If braking and steering functions are limited, the machine
may only be towed in an emergency, the shortest possible
distance, and under supervision of specially trained per-
sonnel. If possible, transport the machine on a trailer. To
release the parking brake, see mechanical release of park-
ing brake for each machine type.
Measures
If possible, the engine should be running to make the brakes
and steering operational.
If it is not possible to start the engine or for any other reason it
is not possible to build up pressure needed to release the park-
ing brake, it is possible to release it mechanically, see page
116.
NOTE! The coupling device on the counterweight or the eyes
on the rear frame inside the rear wheels must not be used
when recovering or towing.
Recovering
Use a towbar or other suitable means for pulling the machine to
a suitable place or trafficable road.
When recovering rearwards, use the eyes under the counter-
weight, which are intended for lashing the machine.
When recovering forwards, use the eyes by the front axle at-
tachment intended for lashing the machine.
To avoid oblique loading, pull the machine straight rearwards/
forwards. Try to distribute the load by connecting to both eyes.
Towing
Eyes under counterweight when towing and lash- The towing vehicle or machine must weigh at least as much as
ing the machine to be towed and must have sufficient engine pow-
er and braking capacity to pull and brake both machines on any
up or down hills.
Do not tow further than absolutely necessary as otherwise the
transmission may be damaged.
When towing further than 10 km (6 miles) or when towing at a
speed exceeding 10 km/h (6 mph), both the front and the rear
propeller shafts must be disconnected, see page 115, or, as an
alternative, the machine must be transported on a trailer.
Connect in a corresponding way as when recovering.
NOTE! It is not possible to start the engine by towing.

Connected to eyes by front axle attach-
ment Follow national regulations where required.
11 026 730
L67530A
Attaching point for lashing

Recovering/towing 115
Disconnecting propeller shafts
WARNING!
Before taking any steps in preparation for recovering or
towing, the parking brake must be applied and the wheels
blocked to prevent the machine from rolling. The greatest
care must be taken in connection with towing to avoid seri-
ous injury which at worst could be fatal.
1 Place the machine in service position, see page 159.

2 Block the wheels in a suitable way, for example using spacer
wedges.
3 Release all brakes.
4 Remove the propeller shaft bolts and detach the propeller
shafts from the drive axles.
After recovering and towing

Before the towbar or wire rope is removed, the following safety
measures should be taken:
1 Stand the machine on level ground.
2 Block the wheels to prevent the machine from rolling.
3 Restore the parking brake, if it has been mechanically re-
leased.
4 Restore the propeller shafts.
NOTE! The parking brake will not have any effect once the
propeller shafts have been disconnected. If the machine is left
without having restored the parking brake, this must be indi-
cated by a label on the steering wheel with the information
that the parking brake has been disabled.
Connecting device on counterweight

NOTE! The connecting device on the counterweight must not
be used when recovering, towing, or when travelling on road.
Follow national regulations.
Maximum temporary force on the towing device (towbar) on the
1003911
counterweight including attachment bracket must not exceed the
following:
Connecting device on counterweight L110F, a horizontal force of 150 kN (33721 lbf) and a vertical force
of 10 kN (2248 lbf).
L120F, a horizontal force of 150 kN (33721 lbf) and a vertical force
of 10 kN (2248 lbf).
The connecting device may only be used temporarily to transport
Volvo Construction Equipment necessary maintenance supplies needed by the machine on the
Volvo Construction Equipment AB
SE-631 85 ESKILSTUNA, SWEDEN work site (attachments, tools, fuel, oils, etc.). The new total weight
Coupling Forces
(machine as well as unbraked trailer with load) may not be heavier
than maximum machine weight, see page 5.
1026949
11445271
116 Recovering/towing
Parking brake, mechanical release
WARNING!
Block the wheels to prevent accidental machine movement.
If it is not possible to start the engine or for any other reason it is

not possible to build up pressure needed to release the parking
brake, it is possible to release it mechanically.
NOTE! However, this is only allowed in order to enable tow-
ing. Immediately after the towing has been completed, the
parking brake must be restored.
Releasing
Remove the three plugs according to figure. Oil will leak out.
Temporarily replace these with three bolts (M10 x 90 mm) and
washers (the bolts are included in the tool bag for the machine).
Tighten the bolts alternately until they bottom.
L46965
Releasing parking brake

Restoring
Unscrew the bolts alternately. Oil will leak out.
Re-install the plugs.
Put the bolts back in the tool bag for the machine.
NOTE! If the machine is left without having restored the park-
ing brake, this must be indicated by a label on the steering
wheel with the information that the parking brake has been
disabled.
WARNING!
If the machine is left without having restored the parking
brake, this must be indicated by a label on the steering
wheel with the information that the parking brake has been
disabled. The machine must not be used until the parking
brake has been restored, which must be carried out at a
workshop authorised by Volvo CE
Transporting machine 117
Transporting machine
Actions before transporting machine
WARNING!
If the machine is driven across from a loading dock onto
the platform of a truck or trailer, make sure that this vehicle
A Attaching points for lashing is securely braked, i.e. the wheels blocked and that there is
B Block the wheels no risk that the vehicle will tip or tilt in a dangerous way as
the machine is driven across.
C Guard on exhaust pipe
NOTE! To avoid air being forced down the exhaust pipe when
transporting, it should be covered with suitable protection (C)
(not plastic). Otherwise the turbocharger may be damaged.
On another vehicle
If the machine is lifted up onto another vehicle, the frame joint
must be locked.
Use intended attaching points for lifting.
L64522A
Lock the frame joint.
Frame joint lock If the machine is driven up on to another vehicle, the frame joint
must not be locked. The frame joint must be locked first when
the machine has been driven up on the trailer.
Tie down (lash) the machine.
118 Transporting machine
On vehicles on other roads and on Baltic Sea

transport
The instructions on pages 119122 are according to the Swedish
Road Administration's regulations VVFS 1998:95, Swedish Mari-
time Administration's decree SJÖFS 2003:14, as well as the
standard SS-EN 12195-1, and applies if the following conditions
are fulfilled:
The machine is from Volvo Construction Equipment AB and is
loaded with or without mounted attachment. The machine's
weight is max. 23,000 kg (50,706 lb) (L110F), 24,000 kg
(52,911 lb) (L120F).
The machine is loaded on a vehicle with trailer bed of wood,
plyfa (plywood), grooved aluminum plates, unpainted or paint-
ed steel plates.
The machine has new or normally used rubber tires or wood-
covered rims of pine or birch. If the wood-covering is made of
birch, then rubber spacers shall be used between wood-cover-
ing and ground surface for the friction 0.5. If rubber spacers are
not used the friction is only 0.2.
The machine stands centred (± 5 cm (2 in)) and is supported on
at least half of the tires' width.
The parking brake is applied and functional, and can handle an
inclination (grade) of at least 14°. The frame joint is locked.
The distance sideways between tie-down points on the load-
carrying transport vehicle is approx. 2,500 mm (8 ft 2.4 in).
The lashings are pre-loaded to at least 4,000 N (400 kg (882
lb)) during the whole transport.
The tie-down points on the trailer have at least the same break-
ing strength as the lashings.
The lashings are located symmetrically in pairs. The lashings
may not rub or chafe on tires or painted surfaces.
It shall not be possible for the tie-down hooks to lose their grip
if the lashings become slack.
Safe loading in the chain (MSL/LC/SWL) is at least 50% of the
breaking strength (MBL). The safety factor for uneven loading
in the lashings is set to 1.35, according to IMO's regulatory sys-
tem.
Dampers may be needed on lashings that are short and vertical
to reduce the jerking and shocks to which the chains may be
subjected.
These dampers may be needed especially on machines trans-
ported with rubber tires.
When using blocks, these must be well fastened, have an angle
of approx. 37° (3:4:5), a height of at least 25 cm (9.8 in), and
are located in pairs; 1, 2, 3, or 4 pairs according to above tables
with block placement.
Placement of rubber tires/wood-covered rims against wheel
slots corresponds to the use of blocks.
Blocking against goose-neck or corresponding in forward direc-
tion replaces chocks in the direction of movement.
L110F
C
F
D E 1
2
Lm
F
3
A-A
Lf Lm Lb
A B
A B
Lf Lm Lb
1053061
B-B
Machine loaded with front

facing forward (F=Travel Lashings' permitted distance intervals in metres
direction)
Blocks Chain min. class 8 Ø10 mm Chain min. class 8 Ø13 mm
Friction sur- (placement MBL 12 ton, LC 60 kN (6 ton) MBL 20 ton, LC 100 kN (10 ton)
faces acc. to Lf Lf
Lm Lb Lm Lb
above) (crossed) (crossed)
Rubber, pine, No blocks Not permitted lashing alternative 0,8 2,5 0,4 1,4 1,8 3,0
birch with 1 pair 1,6 2,8 0,4 1,4 1,7 2,9 0,8 2,5 0,2 1,4 0,8 2,5
rubber (dry
or wet): 2 pairs 0,5 2,5 0,4 1,4 1,7 2,9 0,5 2,5 0,2 1,4 0,8 2,5
μ = 0.5 3 pairs
4 pairs 0,5 2,5 0,0 1,4 0,5 2,5 0,5 2,5 0,0 1,4 0,5 2,5
Frost, ice, No blocks 0,8 2,5 0,4 1,4 1,8 3,0

snow, Not permitted lashing alternatives
1 pair 0,8 2,5 0,2 1,4 0,8 2,5
dirt, birch
without rubber: 2 pairs 0,5 1,2 0,4 1,2 1,7 2,4 0,5 2,5 0,2 1,4 0,8 2,5
μ = 0.2 3 pairs
0,5 1,7 0,0 1,2 0,6 1,7 0,5 2,5 0,0 1,4 0,5 2,5
4 pairs
L110F
C
F
D E 1
2
Lm
F
3
A-A
Lf Lm Lb
A B
A B
Lf Lm Lb 1053062
B-B

facing backward (F=Travel Lashings' permitted distance intervals in metres
direction)
faces acc. to Lb Lb
Lf Lm Lf Lm
Rubber, pine, No blocks Not permitted lashing alternative 0,8 2,5 Not 1,8 3,0
birch with needed
rubber (dry 1 pair 1,7 2,9 0,6 1,2 1,7 2,9 0,8 2,5 Not 0,9 2,5
or wet):
needed
μ = 0.5
2 pairs 0,5 2,5 0,6 1,2 1,7 2,9 0,5 2,5
3 pairs
0,5 2,5 0,0 1,2 0,7 2,5 0,5 2,5 Not 0,5 2,5
4 pairs
needed
Frost, ice, No blocks 0,8 2,5 Not 1,8 3,0
snow, Not permitted lashing alternatives needed
dirt, birch
1 pair
without rubber: 0,5 2,5 Not 0,9 2,5
μ = 0.2 2 pairs 0,5 1,1 0,5 1,1 1,6 2,1
needed
3 pairs
0,5 1,6 0,0 1,1 0,5 1,6 0,5 2,5 Not 0,5 2,5
4 pairs
needed
L120F
C
F
D E 1
2
Lm
F
3
A-A
Lf Lm Lb
A B
A B
Lf Lm Lb
1053061
B-B

facing forward (F=Travel Lashings' permitted distance intervals in metres
direction)
faces acc. to Lf Lf
Lm Lb Lm Lb
birch with 1 pair 1,7 2,9 0,5 1,4 1,6 2,8 0,8 2,5 0,2 1,4 0,8 2,5
rubber (dry
or wet): 2 pairs 0,5 2,5 0,5 1,4 1,6 2,8 0,5 2,5 0,2 1,4 0,8 2,5
μ = 0.5 3 pairs
4 pairs 0,5 2,5 0,0 1,4 0,5 2,5 0,5 2,5 0,0 1,4 0,5 2,5

snow, Not permitted lashing alternatives
1 pair 0,8 2,5 0,2 1,4 0,8 2,5
dirt, birch
without rubber: 2 pairs 0,5 1,1 0,5 1,1 1,6 2,1 0,5 2,5 0,2 1,4 0,8 2,5
μ = 0.2 3 pairs
0,5 1,6 0,0 1,1 0,5 1,6 0,5 2,5 0,0 1,4 0,5 2,5
4 pairs
L120F
C
F
D E 1
2
Lm
F
3
A-A
Lf Lm Lb
A B
A B
Lf Lm Lb 1053062
B-B

facing backward (F=Travel Lashings' permitted distance intervals in metres
direction)
faces acc. to Lb Lb
Lf Lm Lf Lm
birch with 1 pair 1,2 2,5 0,6 1,2 1,9 3,1 0,6 2,5 0,2 1,2 1,2 2,5
rubber (dry
or wet): 2 pairs 0,5 2,5 0,6 1,2 1,9 3,1 0,5 2,5 0,2 1,2 1,2 2,5
μ = 0.5 3 pairs
4 pairs 0,5 2,5 0,0 1,2 0,8 2,5 0,5 2,5 0,0 1,2 0,5 2,5

snow,
1 pair 0,6 2,5 0,2 1,2 1,2 2,5
dirt, birch Not permitted lashing alternatives
without rubber: 2 pairs 0,5 2,5 0,2 1,2 1,2 2,5
μ = 0.2 3 pairs
0,5 1,5 0,0 1,0 0,8 1,8 0,5 2,5 0,0 1,2 0,5 2,5
4 pairs
Across ramp
First check that the ramp is amply wide enough and has the re-
quired strength and that it will not be displaced.
2m
5
489849
In elevator or other narrow space

A
L67514
1 Reverse the machine in.

5m 6,5 m
2 Apply the parking brake and stop the engine before starting the
elevator.
Also follow national or state regulations.
Lifting the machine

L64512B
Lift the machine by the therefore intended lifting eyes (see fig-
ure) and lock the frame joint.
Attaching points when lifting
Lashing of machine
Block the wheels (B).
Tie (lash) the machine down using attaching points (A) intend-
ed for this purpose, so that it cannot tip or begin to roll.
A Attaching points for lashing

B Block the wheels
C Guard on exhaust pipe
124
Operating techniques
Economical operation 125
The following pages contain advice and instructions on how to op-
erate the machine and examples of how the most common attach-
ments are used. It is important that the correct operating
techniques are used to carry out the work in a safe and efficient
way.
hp
Power
kW
Torque
Nm lbf ft
Economical operation
300 220 1200
200 800 To utilise the system in the best way and to achieve low fuel con-
250 180 1000 700
160
sumption, the engine should be run at low speed during all opera-
200 600
140 800 tions. Exceptions are:
120 500
150
600
100
80
Power 400 when filling the bucket, the rpm should be adapted to the mate-
100 Torque
400 rial's hardness.
800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 r/min
L110F during the acceleration phase in longer work cycles (e.g., load
15 20 25 30 35 r/s 1030472
and carry). When transport speed is reached, you can ease off
hp
Power
kW
Torque
Nm lbf ft
on the throttle.
300 220 1200
200 800 Lifting speed and power are sufficient already at low engine
250 180 1000 700 speed, which will result in a lower fuel consumption, lower
160
200
140 800 600 sound level and higher comfort with maintained high produc-
120
150
100 600
500
tivity.
Power 400
100 80 Torque
400 A fuel-saving way of operating also means less wear on the
800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 r/min
L120F machine and sparing the environment. Always strive to:
15 20 25 30 35 r/s 1030471
Operate within the economy rpm range
Economy speed (grey area)
See tables on the left. A high engine rpm rarely means higher
Power
productivity, but often higher fuel consumption. When filling the
.... Torque bucket, the rpm should be adapted to the material's hardness
and during the acceleration phase in longer work cycles (e.g.,
load-carry) high throttle can be used until transport speed is
reached.
Adapt operation to the application
Follow recommendations for the applications described in the
section.
Select attachment according to the application
Using attachments adapted to the application means higher
productivity and lower fuel consumption and machine wear - at
the same time. Follow recommendations described in the sec-
tion.
Maintain correct air pressure in the tires
On page 231 there are recommendations for air pressure in
tires. Correct air pressure in the tires reduces fuel consumption
and machine wear.
Do not let the machine idle unnecessarily
However, follow recommendations for stopping the machine,
see page 111, to ensure the turbo's lubrication.
Plan the work site
Evaluate and plan your work area and its layout based on the
machines that are going to work there, to make work more
organized and effective. Keep the ground surface even and
free from large stones and other potential obstacles.
Cooperate
Cooperate with other operators to enable as effective work as
possible with the machines.
Contact your dealer for more information and for the possibility of
participating in a Volvo course for the area.
126 Whole-body vibrations
Whole-body vibrations
Whole-body vibration emissions on construction machinery are af-
fected by a number of factors, such as the working mode, ground
conditions, speed, etc.
To a large extent the operator can influence the actual vibration

levels, because the operator controls the speed of the machine, its
working mode, the travel path, etc.
Therefore, the result can be a range of different vibration levels for

the same type of machine. For cab specifications, see page 234.
Guidelines for reducing vibration levels on earth-

moving machines
Use the proper type and size of machine, with optional equip-
ment and attachments for a certain application.
Make sure that the ground is kept in good condition.
Remove larger stones and obstacles.
Fill in any ditches and holes.
Provide equipment and schedule time for maintaining ter-
rain conditions.
Adjust the machine speed and chose a suitable travel path to
minimise the vibration level.
Travel around obstacles and uneven ground.
Reduce the speed when it is necessary to go over rough
terrain.
Maintain machines according to the manufacturer's recommen-
dations.
Tire pressures.
Brake and steering systems.
Controls, hydraulic system and linkages.
Make sure that the operator seat is maintained and correctly
adjusted:
Adjust the seat and its suspension according to the oper-
ator weight and height.
Inspect and maintain the operator seat suspension and
adjustment mechanism.
Use the lap-type seat belt and adjust it correctly.
Steer, brake, accelerate, shift gears, and move the attachments
smoothly.
Whole-body vibrations 127
Minimise vibrations during long work cycle or long distance

travelling.
Use Boom Suspension System about the machine is
equipped with such a system.
If the machine is not equipped with Boom Suspension
System, lower the speed to avoid bouncing.
Transport machines when there are long distances be-
tween worksites.
Back pain associated with whole-body vibrations may be caused
by other risk factors.
The following guidelines can be effective to minimize risks of back

pains:
Adjust the seat and controls to achieve good posture.
Adjust the mirrors to minimize twisted posture.
Provide breaks to reduce long periods of sitting.
Avoid jumping down from the machine.
Minimize repeated handling and lifting of loads.
128 Working within dangerous areas
Working within dangerous areas

Do not operate too close to the edge of a quay, ramp etc.
Operate slowly in tight spaces and check that there is enough
room for machine and load.
Operating under ground requires special equipment, e.g., cer-
tified engine within the EU and EEA-countries. Talk to your
dealer.
Use the machine's lights when working in poor light conditions,
e.g., indoors and in tunnels.
Do not work with or operate the machine when visibility is poor,
e.g., in thick fog, heavy snowfall or rain.
The machine must be specially equipped when operating and
working in a contaminated environment or health-hazardous
area. Talk to your dealer. Also check the local regulations be-
fore you enter the area with the machine.
Overhead power lines for high voltage

1053054
14607307
WARNING!
Always contact the power company or
Make sure that the machine does not come into contact
owner of the facility before starting to
work near a high voltage facility. with the power lines. Risk of personal injury if any body
part comes into contact with a 'live' machine (machine con-
ducting electric power).
High voltage is lethal and powerful enough to destroy both ma-

chine and attachment. Always contact the power company before
starting to work near high voltage power lines. Review the special
Voltage Distance instructions that the power company has issued for working or be-
m ft ing near power lines.
Volt (V)
Always consider all power lines to be 'live', even those assumed to
~50,000 3 10 be without power supply. It is a very serious risk to work when the
machine or its load at any time is closer to the power line than the
50,000~69,000 4,6 15 minimum safe distance, see table on the left.
69,000~138,000 5 16,4 Keep in mind that the voltage in the power line decides the safe
distance. Electrical flashovers can damage the machine and in-
138,000~250,000 6 20 jure the operator at relatively great distances from the power
line.
250,000~500,000 8 26 Find out what actions are to be taken if an operator has been
500,000~550,000 11 35 injured by an electrical flashover.
IMPORTANT! Pay attention to overhead power lines when
550,000~750,000 13 43 transporting the machine.
750,000~ 14 46
Working within dangerous areas 129
Railroad overhead contact lines
WARNING!
Keep in mind that the line for the adjacent track may also
be 'live' (conduct electric power).
Loading and unloading is only permitted between the posted

signs. Signs may hang from the contact line or be placed on spe-
cial posts.
Contact authorized railroad staff to obtain permission to load or
unload.
After a temporary break in the work, always contact the railroad
staff again.
Electromagnetic fields, EMF

Working in areas with electromagnetic fields, EMF
WARNING!
Machines equipped with Comfort Drive Control (CDC) and/
or electric servo lever control must not be used on sites
1027909
where static or low frequency magnetic fields could occur

15011966 (for example aluminium smelting plant). In these areas
there may be interference with safety-related functions. If
you are uncertain about whether there are low frequency
magnetic fields occurring at the work site, ask the site man-
agement.
The site management has an obligation to know whether there

are areas where there are strong electromagnetic fields and to
inform the machine operator about these.
The operator should seek information whether the work site
may be exposed to strong electromagnetic fields.
Electromagnetic fields, EMF, may affect the machine, if it is
equipped with electric servo lever control and comfort drive
control (CDC). For Comfort Drive Control (CDC), see page 107.
Underground cables and pipelines

Make sure that authorities or companies responsible for cables
and pipelines have been contacted, and follow their instructions.
Also check what rules apply to those working on the ground with
regards to exposing cables and pipes. Normally only the power
companies' own staff may expose and arrange temporary suspen-
sion of cables.
Get help from a signal man when you cannot see where the job is
being done or when placement of the cable is critical, see page
156. Placement of the cable may be different from the drawing or
the distance assessment may be incorrect. Consider all power
lines and cables to be 'live'.
130 Working within dangerous areas
Working on a grade
WARNING!
When working on a steep grade the attachment shall be
tilted back and kept as close as possible to the ground.
When working on a grade, pay attention to weather and ground

conditions in order to not jeopardize safety.
Be careful when opening the door since it may be more difficult
to control with the machine at an angle. When you close it,
make sure that it is completely closed.
Operate slowly when approaching or running on a downhill
grade.
Do not run faster down a grade than the machine can run up
the same grade.
Do not change travel direction when operating on a grade, and
do not operate across a grade.
If the machine slides, lower the bucket to the ground immedi-
ately. The machine may roll over if it becomes unbalanced. Do
not turn with a load in the bucket, unless the machine is stable.
If absolutely necessary, pile up dirt on the grade so that the ma-
chine can be placed on a level and stable surface.
If the engine stops when the machine is on a grade, lower the
A A attachment to the ground.
IMPORTANT! Follow the recommendations for maximum per-
mitted angle in the table below. The machine's function is
compromised, e.g. lubrication, if recommendations are not
followed and this may lead to machine damage.
B B Maximum permitted angle

1053521
Maximum permitted angle See figure to the left to see how each angle (A and B) affects the
machine.
A Machine affected in longitudinal direction
B Machine affected sideways
Machine affected in longitu- Machine affected sideways
dinal direction (angle A) (angle B)
Continuous Temporary Continuous Temporary
action action action action
A = 15° A = 25° B = 10° B = 20°
Working within dangerous areas 131
Working in water
IMPORTANT! The water must not reach over the lower edge
of seals for hubs, propeller shafts, and real axle oscillation
bearing.
When crossing a body of water with the machine, the water level
may not go over the centre of the wheel hub. Operate carefully if
the water is turbid or dark as it may conceal underwater obstacles
or dangerous deep holes in the bottom. Do not operate the ma-
chine in water if you are not sure that it is safe to do so.
After working in water, all grease points that have been under
water must be greased so that the water is forced out.
Check that no water has penetrated into the transmission or ax-
les.
Working in the cold
WARNING!
At very low temperatures, the machine's hydraulic system
will respond slowly. Be very careful before the system has
reached operating temperature to avoid any accidents.
Read the advice for start, see page 102.

The windows should be free ice and snow before starting to use
the machine.
Watch out for slippery parts on the machine. Only step on slip-
protected areas.
Use an ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. If needed,
use a scraper with a long handle or a ladder.
WARNING!
Avoid contact between unprotected skin and very cold
metal parts - skin will freeze to the metal.
WARNING!
Disconnect the electric engine heater when servicing the
machine. Risk of burn injuries and electric shock.
132 Attachments
Attachments
WARNING!
Do not use attachments to lift or transport a person or
several persons. Risk of personal injury.
Using the correct attachment for a particular job is a deciding factor

when it comes to the capacity of the machine. The machines have
either direct-mounted attachments or attachments mounted in a
bracket which allows rapid changes of attachments.
Always follow Volvo CE's recommendations when selecting at-
tachments. Follow instructions in the Operator's Manual.
According to the EU Machine Directive the CE marking must be
shown on the machine product plate. This marking therefore also
covers the attachments which are designed by Volvo CE, as they
are an integrated part of the machine and adapted to the machine.
Attachments in the category "interchangeable equipment"1) (at-
tachments that can be changed by operator) designed by Volvo
CE are CE-marked and adapted for Volvo wheel loaders and are
supplied with a "Declaration of Conformity" as well as instructions.
The machine owner is responsible for the attachments being ap-
proved for installation on the machine. The machine owner is re-
sponsible for the safety of the combination machine attachment.
For more detailed information about selecting attachments, con-
tact a Volvo CE dealer to get a copy of the attachment catalogue.
The machine is prepared for different attachments. In order to
connect these hydraulically to the machine, the hydraulics must
first be depressurized, see page 135.
The machine's stability may vary depending on the attach-
ments.
1) "interchangeable equipment" (attachments that can be

changed by operator) means that the attachment requires the
combination hydraulic attachment lock ("hook-on") and quick-cou-
plings for optional hydraulics (3rd and 4th hydraulic function).
Transporting attachments with another vehicle for

road and sea transport
Follow the instructions according to standard SS-EN 12195-1, as
well as local transport rules.
Attachment brackets 133
Attachment brackets
IMPORTANT! When changing to another attachment, the
holes for the lock pins in the new attachment should be
cleaned and lubricated.
WARNING!
Never use an attachment until you have checked that it is
securely fastened and that the attachment including
hydraulic hoses, connections and similar are undamaged
your safety is involved.
Connecting
If the attachment requires optional hydraulics (3rd and 4th hydrau-
lic function), see page 135.
L67276A
Attachment bracket locking pins in Tilt forward approx. 15° and hook the Lift, tilt rearward until level
unlocked position bracket into the upper attaching and lock with the locking pins
points on the attachment of the attachment bracket
1 Release the locking pins by pressing the switch.
NOTE! A warning message, "Attachment lock open", will be
shown on the display.
2 Tilt the attachment bracket forward approx. 15° and align the
upper attaching points of the bracket with the upper attaching
points on the attachment.
3 Raise the lifting arms until the attachment rests in the bracket
and tilt the bracket rearward until the attachment is level.
1030216
4 Lock the attachment with the switch.
Attachment locking 5 Check that the attachment is properly locked by pressing the
front edge against the ground. If it is locked, the front wheels
will begin to rise.
6 Confirm locking of the attachment by pressing in SELECT on
WARNING the keypad.
L67523A
11 111 506
WARNING!
Check that the attachment is properly locked by pressing
the front edge of the attachment against the ground, so that
the front end of the machine begins to rise slightly, see the
figure below.
NOTE! On machines with Boom Suspension System and sin-
gle-acting lifting function, these functions must be deactivat-
ed with the switches in order to be able to carry out the check
that the attachment is properly locked.
If you are uncertain as to whether the attachment is securely
locked, you must visually check that the locking pins of the
attachment bracket are in the locked position.
134 Attachment brackets
Disconnecting
1 The attachment should be in a level position on the ground.
2 Release the locking pins by pressing the switch.
NOTE! A warning message, "Attachment lock open", will be
shown on the display.
3 Lower the lifting arms so that they disengage from the attach-
ment.
4 Reverse away from the attachment.
WARNING!
The switch for attachment locking must only be actuated in
connection with the changing of attachments. Otherwise
the pressure may be lost and as a consequence the attach-
ment may work loose and cause injuries.
Hydraulic function, 3rd and 4th 135
Hydraulic function, 3rd and 4th

Make sure that the hydraulic oil in the attachment, which is to be
connected, is not contaminated (foreign particles, water etc.) and
WARNING! that it is of the same quality as that of the machine itself.
When connecting attachments, the The illustration on the left shows couplings for 3rd and 4th hydrau-
operator should make sure that the lic function on the boom's right side. Couplings on the boom's left
expected effect is obtained when side are found in the same position.
moving the control levers. An unex-
pected movement may possibly
result in an accident. Connecting
Always check the function before the 1 See page 133. Follow step 16 to connect.
machine is put to work and that 2 Place the attachment level on the ground.
hydraulic hoses etc. for the attach-
ment can move freely and are suffi- 3 Depressurize the 3rd and 4th hydraulic function, see below.
ciently long throughout the whole 4 Connect the attachment's hydraulic hoses to the machine.
working range of the lifting arms and
the tilting function. Extension hoses NOTE! Always test the control functions for the attachment
are available contact an authorised before starting to work!
dealer workshop.
Disconnecting
1 Place the attachment level on the ground.
2 Depressurize the 3rd and 4th hydraulic function, see below.
3 Disconnect the attachment's hydraulic hoses from the ma-
chine.
4 Make sure that the attachment cannot fall over after discon-
necting.
5 See page 134. Follow steps 24 to disconnect the attachment
from the machine.
B
A Depressurizing, 3rd and 4th hydraulic
function
Residual pressure in the hoses makes it very difficult to part or join
up the quick-action coupling halves.
This is facilitated, by releasing the pressure in the hydraulic sys-
tem, when, for example, you want to disconnect a hydraulic hose:
1 Stop the engine.
2 Ignition switch in position 1.
1053058
Hydraulic function, 3rd and 4th 3 Move the control levers for the relevant function back and forth,
A Coupling, 3rd hydraulic function and hold the levers in their end-positions for three seconds.
B Coupling, 4rd hydraulic function
The pressure in hoses from timber grapples can be released in the
following way:
1 Close the clamping arm fully.
2 Make a quick movement with the lever in the opposite direction.
The hoses become "slack" when the pressure is released.
The attachment should always rest on the ground when re-

leasing the pressure.
Excess pressure in a hydraulic attachment can be released by

slackening the lock nut between the hose and the hydraulic pipe
and then tightening it again. Meanwhile watch the attachment.
Collect the surplus oil.
136 Buckets
Buckets
1 When the machine is used with a bucket, a working load of 50 %
of the tipping load for a fully steered machine is permissible.
Depending on application and/or machine size the manufacturer
often recommends a utilisation lower than 50%.
For information regarding weight, capacity, load, edge savers,
etc., see the Attachment Catalogue.
Bucket teeth, changing, see page 199.
2
WARNING!
Never use the attachment, e.g., a bucket, to transport or lift
persons. Make sure that all persons are at a safe distance
from the attachment before starting to use the machine.
3 NOTE! Excavating or surface stripping must not be carried
out at high speed, if the bucket is tilted more than 15°, and a
fully tilted bucket must be avoided.
Choosing bucket
The choice of bucket is dependent on the condition of the ma-
terial (hard/loose), its density (heavy/light) and on the tipping
4 load of the machine.
A too large bucket relative to the density of the material and the
tipping load of the machine will give the impression that the ma-
chine is weak and unstable and will not increase the productiv-
ity.
For guidance on the choice of bucket, see the Attachment Cata-
logue.
5
IMPORTANT! Check-tighten the bolted joints at the edge sav-
ers and segments to prescribed torque after approx. four
hours of operation. Thereafter check the torque now and
then.
6
Tightening torque for edge savers and segments with
bolted joints (bolt grade 10.9)
Size Tightening torque
M16 275 ±45 Nm (203 ±33 lbf ft)
1053065 M20 540 ± 90 Nm
M24 900 ± 140 Nm
The six most common buckets: 1 1/4 2160 ±345 Nm (1593 ±254 lbf ft)
1 Straight bucket without teeth
(Loose material, sand, earth, fertiliser)
2 Straight bucket with teeth
Bucket operation
(Hard material, gravel, clay, surface stripping) To obtain efficient and safe operation it is important to bear the fol-
3 Spade-nose bucket without teeth lowing points in mind:
(Material which requires good penetration
Select the correct bucket.
force, gravel, finely blasted rock and ore)
4 Spade-nose bucket with teeth Level the ground at the work site as far as possible and make
(Hard and rocky material, sure the ground is firm.
hard gravel and blasted rock) Avoid wheel spin by adapting the engine speed and by trans-
5 Levelling bucket (Finer stripping work, moving ferring as much weight onto the front wheels as possible. This
top soil and levelling filling material). is achieved by slightly raising the bucket after it has begun to
6 Bucket for stockpile loading enter the material.
(Loose sand, gravel, and crushed material)
Work with a straight machine against the material to obtain the
greatest penetrating ability. This also contributes to reduced
tyre wear.
Buckets 137
Bucket with clamping arm

This bucket is the best for loading bulky materials, e.g., waste, tree
branches, etc. The clamping arm is used to hold the bulky material
in the bucket or to pick up materials in tight spaces.
NOTE! For connecting and disconnecting hydraulic hoses for
3rd hydraulic function, see page 135. Always test the control
functions for the attachment before starting to work!
The clamping arm is operated with control lever (3), see page
1053105 74 and 76 (electric servo).
IMPORTANT! Make sure that the clamping arm is completely
open if the bucket is used to push aside or compress materi-
als. Otherwise the clamping arm may be damaged.
Check the hydraulic lines at regular intervals for leaks and vis-
ible damage.
Grease the bearings for the clamping arm and cylinder every
250 hours and every 50 hours in aggressive/corrosive condi-
tions. For grease quality, see page 217.
Always depressurize the hydraulic system before starting main-
tenance or repair work, and before disconnecting the attach-
ment.
Work on the hydraulic system may only be done by authorized
personnel.
138 Buckets
High-tip bucket (optional equipment)

The high-tip bucket is a combination of carrier and bucket. When
tipping, the carrier acts as an extension of the boom, which gives
great tipping height. When loading and transporting the bucket is
tilted back between the carrier, and the bucket is in almost the
same posisiton as a standard bucket, and thus there are barely
any disadvantages with regards to breakout force, lifting force, and
tipping load.
M300099A
The bucket cylinder is activated in "tilt function" with control le-

ver (3), see page 74 and 76 (electric servo).
For loading, transporting, and lifting the bucket should be tilted
back completely.
Only empty the bucket when the desired lifting height has been
reached.
NOTE! Avoid tipping the high-tip bucket with the standard tip-
ping function, or if that is the case, use low tipping speed, so
that the bucket remains completely tilted back on the carrier.
Avoid tipping the high-tip bucket forward or back against the
end-stops with full force in order to prevent damage to the
bucket and cylinders.
Clean the carrier arms from dirt at regular intervals.
ible damage, replace if needed.
Check the dampers (buffers) on the tilt-back stops at regular in-
tervals, replace if needed.
Grease the bucket support and the cylinder bearings every 250
hours and every 50 hours in aggressive/corrosive conditions.
For grease quality, see page 217.
tenance or repair work.
personnel.
Buckets 139
Gravel and heap loading

1 Adjust the bucket so that it is level and lower it to the ground
just in front of the gravel heap.
2 Enter the material in 2nd gear + kick-down. When the machine
has nearly come to a standstill because the maximum tractive
effort of the machine has been reached, begin to raise the
bucket while at the same time tilt backward with short control
1003925 lever movements.
If possible avoid tilting the bucket forward when filling it. Ex-
aggerated lever movements causes wheel spin. Never move
into the material at a high speed.
Suitable bucket: Straight bucket with or with-

out teeth.
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 2 or
4
Mode selector: M- or AUT-mode
Boom Suspension System: Gear-dependent position
WARNING!
1003926 Pay attention - risk of falling materials. Falling materials
can cause serious accidents in case of careless operation.
Excavating
When excavating and surface stripping, start by angling the
bucket 23° downward.
Operate in 1st gear and at low engine speed. Gradually in-
crease the engine speed at the same time as you raise the
bucket slightly.
If the ground conditions are poor and the wheels tend to spin,
use the differential lock.
NOTE! You must never engage the differential lock when one
of the wheels is spinning. Let up the accelerator until the
wheel stops.
Suitable bucket: Straight with or without teeth

(alt. levelling bucket)
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 2
Fully automatic downshift- Activated
ing
Mode selector: AUTO-position
Boom Suspension System: Not activated
140 Buckets
Rock loading
Correct engine speed is of great importance too high engine
speed causes wheel spin.
Drive into the material head on to avoid oblique stresses which
can harm the lifting arm system.
The edge of the bucket must find its way under and between
the stones, which means that you must watch the bucket care-
fully as it enters the material.
If a stone has become wedged, try a new angle of approach,
but avoid exerting pressure on the corner of the bucket.
Avoid driving up into the material, as there is then a great risk
of damage to the tyres by the sharp blasted pieces of rock. Also
remove stones that have fallen out of the bucket.
Suitable bucket: Spade-nose bucket with or

without teeth.
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 2
Mode selector: M- or AUT-mode
Transporting load (loading carrying)

The bucket should be fully tilted backward and kept in the car-
rying position 3040 cm (1216 in) above the ground.
Keep the transporting road even and free from stones and oth-
er objects. There is always spillage from a too full bucket.
Even out the road on the way back if necessary.
Suitable maximum speed: Approx. 15 km/h (9.3 mph)

Suitable gear: M- or AUTO-mode
Mode selector: AUTO position
When operating where gear-shift hunting arises, select the H

mode as the machine then must reach a higher travelling
speed before upshifting takes place.
Example: When operating up long inclines during loading/
carrying work.
NOTE! Remember that the stability of a heavily loaded ma-

chine changes when it is steered.
Buckets 141
Dumping load
WARNING!
If visibility is limited by the load or the attachment, great
care must be taken. Walk around the machine before start-
ing and make sure that no persons remain in or enter the
working area of the machine. If you are uncertain, raise the
load and check the conditions in the operating area by
looking under the load and operate at low speed. If neces-
sary, arrange for a signalling person to take charge and to
help the operator under "tricky" circumstances. Great care
must be taken to prevent injuries and damage to property.
If you are working on an incline, try to arrange so that the load

can be dumped uphill. This affects the stability of the machine
in a positive way.
Keep the bucket as close to the platform or bin as possible to
achieve a smooth dumping and better control of the positioning
of the load.
When loading rock, try to fill the first bucket with as fine material
as possible in order to soften the impact of subsequent larger
pieces.
Positioning of transporting vehicle

The positioning of the hauler (transporting vehicle) is of great
importance for making the loading operation efficient.
The operator should indicate where the transporting vehicle is
to stand, suitably by "pointing" with the bucket. Having done so
the operator is then responsible for that the place is safe.
Levelling
The bucket should lie flat against the ground. To be able to fill
any hollows you should have material in and in front of the
bucket when operating forwards.
To finish off the levelling operation, keep the edge of the bucket
slightly downward and reverse while pressing the bucket lightly
against the ground.
If a dozer blade, snow plough or sweeper etc. is used, it may
advantageous to have the single-acting lifting function en-
gaged. This allows the attachment to follow any unevenness in
the ground by "floating". This means that steering ability and
traction power is maintained. The attachment returns to preset
position, see page 59.
Suitable bucket: Straight without teeth (alt.

grading bucket)
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 1 or
2
Fully automatic downshift- Activated
ing
Boom Suspension System: Not activated
142 Log grapples (optional equipment)
Log grapples
The clamping arm is operated with control lever (3) and coun-
terhold (optional equipment) with control lever (4), see page 74
and 76 (electric servo).
ible damage.
Grease the bearings for the clamping arm and cylinder every
ment.
personnel.
There are four types of log grapples:

A Unloading grapple has short tines which makes it easier to fill
the grapple when unloading a transporting vehicle.
B Sorting grapple has a relatively long clamping arm, which can
be set parallel to the ground. This facilitates filling the grapple
when taking from a stack and a sorting bin.
C General purpose grapple has longer fork tines than the sort-
ing grapple and can be used for handling whole trunks when
sorting or grabbing single trunks.
Tropical grapple also is wide and has two separate clamping
arms in order to get a secure grip on large, heavy logs.
A B C
L64526A
The CEN standard EN 474-3 applies within the EU, which means
that nominal operating load is expressed as a percentage of the
tipping load. In accordance with this, Volvo CE have chosen to
adapt its internal standard for stating the capacity of timber grap-
ples.
The recommended maximum loads apply for combinations of tim-
ber grapples and wheel loaders which are equipped with approved
counterweights for timber handling.
Any equipment added to the attachment reduces the rated operat-
ing load.
In countries outside the EU and EEA other safety requirements
may apply, therefore, always observe local regulations.
Log grapples (optional equipment) 143
Working with log grapples

Unloading vehicle
Take great care when filling the grapple so that the stakes and the
frame of the truck are not damaged.
1 Approach the vehicle which is to be unloaded with a raised and
fully open grapple.
2 Tilt the grapple forward and lay it down over the load.
1003945
Close the clamping arm and begin to tilt slightly upward. Then re-
peat alternate closing and upward tilting of the grapple until it is full.
NOTE! Take great care when unloading a vehicle, particularly
when there are only a few logs left. If the grapple should grip
round the far edge of the platform this could lead to damage.
Loading vehicle with timber grapples

1 Make sure that each log lies correctly in the grapple to avoid
crows nest.
2 Approach the vehicle to be loaded while at the same time rais-
ing the attachment so that the logs clear the stakes.
3 Lower the grapple until it is level on the bunks or the platform
and deposit the bundle against the stakes on the far side.
4 Open the clamping arm fully and carefully reverse out.
1003944
Stacking
For machines with Boom Suspension System it is recommended
that speed-dependent function should be selected. The precision
increases and the risk of "crows nest" reduces.
1 Keep the grapple as near the stack as possible to prevent logs

falling down.
2 Tilt the grapple slightly forward.
3 Carefully open the clamping arm fully so that the logs can roll
out of the grapple.
4 Reverse carefully and at the same time lower the grapple and
hold it close to the load to prevent logs from falling.
The grapple's counterhold can be used as heel kick-out and

therefore you do not have to tilt the grapple forward. The lifting
height of the machine is better utilised and one can build higher
stacks. The heel kick-out can also be used as a counter hold
when handling single logs.
Basic rule: Make sure that the logs leave the grapple without fall-
ing.
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 4.

Mode selector: L- or AUTO-mode
Boom Suspension System: Speed-dependent position
144 Log grapples (optional equipment)
Picking up from a stack

Low stack:
1 Keep the grapple tines flat against the ground with the grapple
fully open.
2 Enter the grapple into the stack and close the clamping arm as
far as possible.
3 Carefully reverse while closing the grapple further.
High stack:
1 Begin as high as possible and tilt the grapple tines slightly for-
ward with the grapple fully open.
2 When the grapple is well into the stack, close it.
3 Follow through with the grapple so as to avoid logs falling down
under the grapple tines.
If logs fall between the grapple tines, carefully lower the load
to the ground, reverse and try to pick up the load again. Make
sure not to damage the logs.
A heel/kick-out makes it possible to stack the logs higher and to
keep the ground in front of the wheels of the machine clear of logs.
Operating with whole trunks

Pay special attention to that the centre of gravity of the timber
is correctly positioned so as to maintain a satisfactory side-sta-
bility of the machine.
Make use of a signal man when operating where the view is re-
stricted, see page 156.
WARNING!
Long objects such as logs must be handled with extreme
care! Make sure that all persons are outside the machine's
work area.
High-Lift grapple (optional equipment) 145
High-Lift grapple
The high-lift grapple, which is connected to the attachment brack-
et, handles 23 metre lengths of pulpwood. It is suitable for un-
loading vehicles to stack or feed table, and for transport from stack
to feed table.
3rd and 4th hydraulic function, see page 135. Always test the
control functions for the attachment before starting to work!
1053111 The grapple arms are operated with control lever (3) and the
high-lift grapple is rotated with control lever (4), see page 74
and 76 (electric servo).
ible damage.
Grease the bearings for the grapple arms and cylinder every
ment.
personnel.
146 Pallet forks (optional equipment)
Pallet forks (optional equipment)

IMPORTANT! Only pallet forks approved for the machine by
B
Volvo CE may be used.
Pallet forks are only to be used for intended purpose:
Must, for example, therefore not be used as a crowbar for
prizing loose a tree stump, large stone or similar.
A (90o) Must not be overloaded or loaded obliquely.
Must not be used as lifting equipment together with chains or
C slings for lifting objects.
L66614A
IMPORTANT! To avoid damage to the pallet forks it is recom-
Checking fork tines mended that single-acting lifting function should be acti-
A Angle vated, especially when reversing and if the fork points
B Attaching lugs contact the ground. This is especially important when the
C Thickness ground is uneven.
Fork tine back frame and fork tines must be dimensioned to with-
stand loads which the lifting capacity of the machine permits.
Pallet forks and fork retainer must be kept free from dirt and rust
and be well greased for best possible function.
The fork arms are dimensioned according to ISO 2330 and are
classified together with the machine according to the norms in
force.
D IMPORTANT! Make sure that the stops that prevent the fork
1027071
arms from sliding off the fork frame are in place. Particularly
Fork frame
important when the fork arms are moved sideways manually.
D Stop Make sure that the fork tines are locked against the fork car-
rier, so that the fork tines are prevented from moving side-
ways.
WARNING!
Check the pallet forks regularly as regards wear. It is particular-
The supports must be lowered
before the pallet fork is removed ly important to check the heel of the fork tine.
from the machine. Check that stops (D) for the fork arms are properly located.
Check that the fork arms are locked against the fork frame.
The fork tine should not be used any more if:
the fork tine has been worn down to 90% of its original
L66613A
thickness
the angle between fork tine and shank has become great-
er than 93°.
Marking the attaching lugs are worn or cracked.
1 Max. load per tine (kg) *) Cracks or wear must not be made good by welding.
2 Distance to centre of gravity in mm for max-
imum load
3 Thickness of fork tine at delivery
Fork tine extensions
*) Must not be confused with rated operating Fork tine extensions are used when handling light material with low
load for the respective loader model. density and it is marked with maximum load.
Pallet forks (optional equipment) 147
Operating with pallet forks

The most important points for work with pallet forks are:
The operator should have suitable training.
The operator is responsible for that permissible load values are
not exceeded.
The fork makes a semicircular movement when it is raised.
Therefore, start raising the fork a little bit away from the place
where the load is to be placed.
The fork must not be raised other than when stacking or depos-
iting pallets.
When operating without a load in the fork, the tines should be
1003933 held low and tilted upward.
When stacking material, the fork tines should be kept horizon-
tal.
Choose the most suitable travel path with the smoothest sur-
face or, when required, rectify by levelling off the ground.
The travelling speed should be adapted to the ground condi-
tions.
For increased stability, when working with pallet forks, it is im-
portant that the tyre pressure is correct according to recom-
mendations.
With a wide load it may be advantageous to move the fork arms
out on the fork frame to obtain increased stability of the load.
Also make sure that the load is centred sideways with regard to
the centre of gravity.
When operating downhill with a heavy load it may be better to
reverse the machine.
NOTE! For heavy work which require great break-out force,

e.g. breaking out tree stumps and carrying marble blocks
use attachments approved by Volvo CE.

Mode selector: L- or AUTO-mode
Boom Suspension System: Speed-dependent position or
not activated
Single-acting lifting func- Activated
tion
148 Pallet forks (optional equipment)
Picking up a load
Choose fork tines with a correct length so that they do not pro-
trude outside the load. Previously deposited pallet or goods
may be damaged as the penetrating force of the fork tines is
very great.
Place the load as close to the vertical shank of the fork as pos-
sible.
Lift the load with the least possible inclination of the pallet fork.
There may be deviations from the complete parallel movement
(see the Specifications) and this may affect the use of the fork.
Operating with a load

Keep the load low 3040 cm (1216 in) above the ground to
achieve the best possible stability and vision.
Tilt the load rearward to hold it more secure.
If the load obscures the vision, reverse the machine to the
place where the load is to be deposited.
1003936 Adapt the speed to the existing conditions.
When handling high loads, use a special load support.
Combi forks (optional equipment)

The combination grapple is a good alternative when handling ma-
terial that require a certain amount of holding. Here a special com-
bi-fork back frame is used where standard fork tines are installed.
The combi fork is suitable for:
Palletised goods and round timber.
Within the pulp industry and on building sites, where both pal-
letised goods and compressed material (waste paper, packag-
ing material etc.) are handled.
The clamping arms are operated with control lever (3), see
page 74 and 76 (electric servo).
1053106 Check the hydraulic lines at regular intervals for leaks and vis-
ible damage.
Grease the bearings for the clamping arms and cylinder every
WARNING tions. For grease quality, see page 217.
ment.
personnel.
WARNING!
L67323A The supports must be lowered before the pallet fork is
removed from the machine.
Pallet forks (optional equipment) 149
Sideshift forks (optional equipment)

Sideshift forks are designed for use when the width of the load var-
ies. The fork tines are adjusted hydraulically according to the width
of the load.
3rd and 4th hydraulic function, see page 135. Always test the
control functions for the attachment before starting to work!
The fork tines are operated with control lever (3) and (4), see
page 74 and 76 (electric servo).
1053107 Check the hydraulic lines at regular intervals for leaks and vis-
ible damage.
Grease the bearings for the fork tines and cylinder every 250
hours and every 50 hours in aggressive/corrosive conditions.
For grease quality, see page 217.
ment.
WARNING personnel.
WARNING!
The supports must be lowered before the pallet fork is
removed from the machine.
Approval and legal provisions

L67323A The permissible rated operating load capacity according to CEN
standard EN 474-3 is given as a percentage of the tipping load.
The percentage values, which must not be exceeded, are as fol-
lows:
Uneven ground: 60 % of tipping load

Firm and even ground: 80 % of tipping load
It must be possible to control and handle the load hydraulically in

all likely positions at the same time as all other hydraulic circles are
actuated. The maximum permissible load capacity is determined
either by the stability of the machine or its hydraulic capacity
whichever is less.
In countries outside the EU/EEA other regulations may apply.
Therefore, always check which local rules apply.
150 Material handling arm (optional equipment)
Material handling arm

The material handling arm is available in two versions. One ver-
sion has an extension boom that is adjusted mechanically, and the
other version has an extension boom that can be lowered hydrau-
lically.
The material handling arm with hydraulic lowering function is used
when loads have to be lowered under ground level or when there
is a need to pass obstacles. The material handling arm with hy-
draulic lowering function features a hose rupture valve and the ex-
tension boom can be lowered with limited speed.
Lowering of the material handling arm is operated with control
lever (3), see page 74 and 76 (electric servo).
ible damage.
Grease the bearings for the extension boom and cylinder every
ment.
personnel.
IMPORTANT! Only a material handling arm approved by
Volvo CE for use with the machine, may be used.
Maximum permissible load for the machine using a material han-
dling arm is shown in an operating load table on pages 247248,
and may not be exceeded.
The rated operating load capacity given applies when the machine
is operated on firm and level ground and is, at the most, half of the
tipping load. When operating on uneven ground, the load must be
adapted to the ground conditions.
A mounting check must be carried out every time the attachment
has been mounted to check that the attachment is locked.
Check that the attachment is locked by pressing it against the
ground.
In certain countries it is a legal requirement that regular checks are
carried out by an authorised person, who should also keep a spe-
cial inspection diary over these checks.
Positioning of machine
It is important that the ground where the machine is to be placed
is level and firm. If the ground is soft, contact the management so
that necessary action can be taken.
Material handling arm (optional equipment) 151
Loading
Apply the load table to the actual extension of the material han-
dling arm.
Make sure that the pressure in the front tyres are according to
the recommendations, if the maximum permissible load is uti-
lised frequently.
Do not lift until you know:
where the load is to go.
that it can be placed there.
that the correct lifting device is used (wire, chain, etc.).
that the sling is connected to the load in a correct way.
that you have been given the signal to lift, if a signal man is as-
sisting.
NOTE! The material handling arm must not be used for a
heavier load than has been specified for the particular arm ex-
tension.
WARNING!
Never use the attachment, e.g., a bucket, to transport or lift
persons. Make sure that all persons are at a safe distance
from the attachment before starting to use the machine.
Operating with material handling arm

Remember that a small movement at the attachment bracket
becomes a large movement at the outer end of the material
handling arm.
Operate the machine and the material handling arm with gentle
and careful movements, so that the load does not start to
swing.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the material
handling arm.
Operating load table is found on pages 247248.
When transporting on, for example, a public road, the material
handling arm should be fully retracted and the front end should
be tilted rearward.
Extending or shortening the arm length should be done manu-
ally (be aware of the risk of pinching).
NOTE! If the length of the material handling arm has been
changed, check that the pins at the ends of the respective
sections have been locked in a secure way (special locking
pins).
Only use lifting attachments which are approved and which do
not overload the machine.
152 Material handling arm (optional equipment)
Operating with a load
WARNING!
A swinging load may lead to the machine rolling over. Note
that stability is affected when the machine turns.
When moving with a suspended load, keep the material han-

dling arm as low as possible. The speed should be limited to
6 km/h (3.7 mph).
Use slings to stabilise and to prevent the load from swinging.
A lift should not be carried out when the force of the wind and
the bulk of the load are such that the load cannot be handled
with safety.
Keep your eyes on the load at all times. If, at any time, you can-
not see the load, a signal man must be called in before starting
the job. (See page156).
Operate the material handling arm as smoothly as possible.
Do not move a load above persons, office and personnel huts.
Under no circumstances should the material handling arm be
used for pulling up boards or planks which have been nailed
down. Pulling obliquely must not be done.

Boom Suspension System: Speed-dependent position or
not activated
Rotating attachments 153
Rotating attachments
Hydraulically powered, rotating
attachments
WARNING!
A machine with a hydraulically powered attachment must
be provided with an emergency stopping device inside the
cab. The stopping device turns off the power to the attach-
ment and stops its movement.
For the position of the emergency stop, see page 56

If the machine is used with hydraulically powered, rotating working
parts, e.g. brush, bush clearer, sand spreader, the following gen-
eral safety rules must be followed:
1026244
The fitting of such attachment for the first time must only be
Hydraulic emergency stop done by a trained person.
Read, understand and follow the instructions supplied with the
attachment.
Always stop (turn off the hydraulic supply) the rotating/moving
part of the attachment before you leave the cab.
When servicing or maintaining the attachment or in case of the
working parts having come to a standstill while operating, the
hydraulic hoses to the attachment must be disconnected in or-
der to prevent accidental engagement of the hydraulic power,
which might result in an accident.
Check that the attachment in question is CE marked, if the attach-

ment is not made by Volvo CE.
Make sure that the dealer has written the attachment into the "Dec-
laration of Conformity" for your machine as being an approved at-
tachment.
WARNING!
To avoid accidents, always find out from the manufacturer
what instructions for safe handling apply BEFORE you fit
and start using a hydraulically powered attachment.
154 Lifting objects
Lifting objects
WARNING!
Objects may only be lifted using purpose-built lifting
devices.
The lifting devices that are used shall be adapted to and ap-
proved for the machine on which they are used.
IMPORTANT! Do not use damaged, defective, or uncertified
lifting devices.
IMPORTANT! Different countries have their own regulations
with regards to using the machine for lifting, e.g., to lift free-
hanging loads. Contact an authorized Volvo CE dealer for
more information.
IMPORTANT! Follow the permitted nominal loads for the
machine in lifting and transport operations.
Stability
The stability of machines at work changes and is subject to great
variations.
For work to be done safely, the operator must keep in mind and
consider the special conditions at the time.
Standing the machine on a horizontal, stable and secure
surface is one prerequisite for high stability.
Watch out for soft, uneven, or sloping ground, as well as ground
where there is risk of landslides. Be very careful with loading
the machine sideways and in connection with other similar
high-risk work. If the machine stands on sloping ground, the
centre of gravity is displaced and the machine may end up in a
position where it rolls over.
Make sure that the ground surface is stable and secure.
Unstable ground, e.g. loose sand or wet earth can make work
unsafe.
Do not turn suddenly with a suspended load. Remember the
centrifugal force.
Operate the machine slowly and carefully.
Make sure that visibility is not reduced by big loads. If needed,
get help from a signal man.
Lifting objects 155
Slinging long loads

Boards, planks, reinforcing irons or similar should have the
sling(s) arranged so that the load cannot fall out.
When lifting girders, a pair of girder scissors should preferably
be used.
Padding made from, for example, cut up compressed-air hoses
may be used in order to protect the slings.
The sling should be well tightened.
Running checks of lifting attachments

Continuous supervision should be carried out at regular intervals
by a knowledgeable and experienced person and arranged by the
employer. Should wear, cracks or other deficiencies, which may
jeopardise the safety of the machine or the lifting equipment, be
noticed during the running checks, the machine or the lifting equip-
ment must not be used.
L64488A
156 Signalling diagram
Signalling diagram
If the operator's view is restricted because of, for example, an
obscuring load, a signal man must be used.
The faster lifting or lowering movements that are required or the
faster the machine should move, the more lively should the signal
man's movements be carried out. If two or more operators make
use of the same signal man, there should be an agreement before-
hand how the lift is to be carried out and how the signals are to be
given to the respective operator.
L67279A
L67281A
L67280A
START STOP END

Both arms are extended horizon- Right arm pointing upward with the Both hands are clasped at chest
tally with the palms facing forward palm facing forward height
L67283A
L67278A
L67282A
RAISE LOWER VERTICAL DISTANCE

Right arm pointing upward with the Right arm pointing downward with The hands indicate the relevant
palm facing forward and the hand the palm facing forward and the distance
slowly making a circle hand slowly making a circle
L67284A L67285A
L67277A
MOVE FORWARD MOVE REARWARD DANGER (EMERGENCY STOP)

Both arms bent with the palms Both arms bent with the palms Both arms pointing upward with the
turned upward and the forearms turned downward and the forearms palms facing forward
slowly moving toward the body slowly moving downward away
several times from the body several times
Signalling diagram 157
L67286A L67287A L67288A
OPERATE IN INDICATED DIREC- OPERATE IN INDICATED DIREC- HORIZONTAL DISTANCE

TION TION The hands indicate the relevant
The arm extended horizontally with The arm extended horizontally with distance
the palm facing downward and the the palm facing downward and the
arm making small slow movements arm making small slow movements
to the right to the left
158
Safety when servicing
Service position 159

This section deals with the safety rules which must be followed
when checking and servicing the machine. Volvo CE disclaim all
responsibility if other tools, lifting devices or working methods are
used than those described in this publication.
L68293A
Further safety rules and warning texts are given within the respec-
tive sections.
NOTE! Lifting with a jack must only be carried out by trained

personnel.
WARNING!
If you have to do work on the machine
before it has cooled down: Be very Service position
careful with hot fluids and machine
parts to avoid scalding and burn inju- BEFORE you begin service work, the machine must be placed
ries. on level ground and prepared as shown below.
AFTER you have completed the service, any guard plates must
be re-installed and all engine covers are to be closed and locked.
2 4
3
5
P ! 8
L61721C
6 7
1 The attachment should be resting on the ground. 5 Attach a black and yellow label to the steering
wheel.
2 Apply the parking brake. 6 Connect the frame joint lock.
3 Stop the engine and take out the ignition key. 7 Block the wheels in a suitable way
(Does not apply when checking oil level in trans- (with, for example, wedges).
mission).
4 Carefully release the pressure in pressure lines 8 Allow the machine to cool.
and pressure vessels to avoid risks.
160 Before service read
Before service read

Prevent personal injuries
Read the instructions in the Operator's Manual before starting
any work on the machine. It is also important to read and follow
the information and instructions given on plates and decals.
Do not wear loose-fitting clothing or jewellery that may get
caught and cause injuries.
Always wear a hard hat, protective eyeglasses, work gloves,
and protective work shoes when required by the job.
Make sure that ventilation is adequate if the engine is going to
be started indoors.
Do not stand in front of or behind the machine while the engine
L64527A is running.
Turn off the engine before you remove any protective covers or
open the engine hood.
There remains an accumulated pressure in the system, even
when the engine has been turned off. If a system is opened
without first being depressurized, high-pressure fluid may jet
out.
Use a piece of paper or cardboard when checking for leaks,
never use your hand.
Make sure that stepping surfaces, handholds and slip protect-
ed surfaces are free from oil, diesel fuel, dirt and ice.
Only step on machine parts that are provided with slip-protec-
tion.
It is important that correct tools and equipment are used. Faulty
tools or defective equipment must be repaired or replaced.
If service work has to be done under a raised blade or attach-
ment, make sure that it is secured before starting any work. En-
gage the control lock-out and apply the parking brake, if
installed on the machine.
Prevent machine damage
Use equipment with adequate lifting capacity when lifting or
supporting the machine or parts of the machine.
Volvo CE will not accept any responsibility if other lifting devic-
es, tools, work methods, lubricants, and parts than those de-
scribed in this Operator's Manual are used.
Make sure that no tools or other objects that can cause damage
have been forgotten in or on the machine.
Release the pressure in the hydraulic system before beginning
service work.
Never adjust a relief valve to a higher pressure than that rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
Machines used in contaminated conditions or health-hazard-
ous areas must be equipped for such operations. Also, special
safety rules apply when servicing such machines.
When installing two-way radio, mobile telephone or similar
equipment, the installation must be carried out according to the
instructions from the manufacturer in order to eliminate interfer-
ence with the electronic system and components intended for
the function of the machine, see page 14.
Actions to be taken in connection with electric welding, see
page 185.
Make sure that all belly plates, guards, covers, and hoods on
the machine are in place before starting the engine and using
the machine.
Use the three-point method (two feet and one hand) when
cleaning or scraping the windscreen.
Before service read 161
Prevent environmental influence

Be conscious of the environment when carrying out service and
maintenance. Oil and other liquids dangerous to the environment
and released into the environment will cause damage. Oil de-
grades very slowly in water and sediment. One litre of oil can de-
stroy millions of litres of drinking water.
NOTE! In common for all points below is that all waste is to be
handed over to a treatment and disposal firm approved by the
authorities.
When draining, oils and liquids must be collected in suitable
vessels and steps taken to avoid spillage.
Used filters must be drained of all liquid before they are passed
on as waste. Used filters from machines which work in environ-
ments with asbestos or other dangerous dust, must be placed
in the bag supplied with the new filter.
Batteries contain substances dangerous to the environment
and health. Used batteries must therefore be handled as waste
dangerous to the environment.
Consumables, e.g. used rags, gloves and bottles may also be
contaminated with oils and liquids dangerous to the environ-
ment and must in that case be treated as waste dangerous to
the environment.
162 Fire protection
Fire protection
WARNING!
Special equiment is required if the machine is used in areas
with very high fire hazard, e.g., explosive environments.
There is always a risk of fire. Find out which type fire extinguisher
that is used at your place of work and how it is used. A fire extin-
guisher is optional equipment and is available from your dealer. If
the machine is equipped with a fire extinguisher, it should be locat-
ed on the back part of the front fender.
If the machine is equipped with a portable fire extinguisher it
should be of the type ABE (ABC in North America). The designa-
tion ABE means that it can be used to put out fires in both solid or-
ganic materials and fluids, and that the fire extinguishing agent
does not conduct electricity. Efficiency class I means that the fire
extinguisher must operate effectively for at least 8 seconds, effi-
ciency class II at least 11 seconds, efficiency class III at least 15
seconds.
In general, a portable fire extinguisher ABE I corresponds to an ef-
fective content of 4 kg (8.8 lbs) (EN-class 13A89BC), standard EN
3-1995 part 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Fire prevention
It is forbidden to smoke or have an open flame near a machine
when filling with fuel or when the fuel system has been opened
and in contact with the surrounding air.
Diesel fuel is flammable and must not be used for cleaning. In-
stead use car care products intended for cleaning or degreas-
ing. Also keep in mind that certain solvents may cause skin
rash, damage the paint finish, and constitute a fire hazard.
Keep the place where the service is to be carried out clean. Oil
and water can make floors and steps slippery. This may also be
dangerous in connection with using electrical equipment or
electrically powered tools. Oily or greasy clothes are a serious
fire hazard.
Check daily that the machine and equipment are free from dust
and oil. This reduces the risk of fire and also makes it easier to
detect loose or damaged parts.
NOTE! Be very careful when using a high-pressure washer for
cleaning since electrical components and cable insulation
may be damaged at relatively low pressure and temperature.
Protect electrical components and cables in an appropriate
way.
Take extra care when cleaning a machine that is used in a fire-
sensitive environment, e.g. sawmill and refuse dumps. The risk
of spontaneous combustion can be further reduced by, for ex-
ample, installing insulation on the muffler.
The fire extinguisher must be maintained so that it works when
it is needed.
Fire protection 163
Check that fuel lines, hydraulic and brake hoses and electrical
cables have not been damaged by chafing or are not in danger
of being damaged in that way because of incorrect installation
or clamping. This applies particularly to unfused cables, which
are red and marked R (B+) and routed:
between the batteries
between battery and starter motor
between alternator and starter motor
Electrical cables must not lie directly against oil or fuel lines.
Do not weld or grind on components which are filled with flam-
mable liquids, e.g. tanks and hydraulic pipes. Exercise care
with such work in the proximity of such places. A fire extinguish-
er should be kept near to hand.
Actions in case of fire

If conditions allow and it is possible without risking your own
safety, take the following actions at the slightest sign of fire:
1 Stop the machine if it is moving.
2 Lower the attachments to the ground.
3 Move the control lock-out, if installed, to locked position.
4 Turn the ignition key to the stop position.
5 Leave the cab.
6 Call the fire department.
7 Turn off the battery disconnector, if it can be reached safely.
8 If possible try to put out the fire. Otherwise move away from the
machine and the danger area.
Actions after fire

When handling a machine which has been damaged by fire or
been exposed to other intense heat, the following protective
steps must under all circumstances be taken:
Use protective goggles and thick protective gloves made of
rubber.
Never touch burnt components with your bare hands to avoid
contact with melted polymers. First wash thoroughly with plenty
of lime water (a solution of calcium hydroxide, i.e. slaked lime
in water).
Handling of heated fluoro-carbon rubber, see page 165.
164 Handling hazardous materials
Handling hazardous materials

Heated paint
WARNING!
Heating of painted surfaces, rubber, or plastic parts can
generate health-hazardous or environmentally hazardous
substances. Be very careful when, e.g., welding, grinding,
or cutting with a torch. Use suitable protective equipment.
When heated, paint gives off poisonous gases. Therefore, the

paint must be removed from an area of at least 10 cm (4 in) from
the spot where welding, grinding or gas cutting is to be carried out.
In addition to the health hazard, the weld will be of inferior quality
and strength, which in the future may cause the weld to break.
Methods and precautionary measures when removing paint
Blasting
use respirator and protective goggles
Paint remover or other chemicals
use a portable air extractor, respirator and protective
gloves
Grinding machine
use a portable air extractor, respirator and protective
gloves and protective goggles
Painted parts that have been discarded must never be burnt. They
must be taken care of by an approved refuse handling plant.
Rubber and plastics which have been heated

Polymer materials can, when heated, form compounds which are
dangerous to health and environment and must therefore never be
burned when scrapped.
If gas cutting or welding is to be carried out near such mate-
rials, the following safety instructions must be followed:
Protect the material from heat.
Use protective gloves, protective goggles and an approved res-
pirator.
Handling hazardous materials 165
Fluoro-carbon rubber which has been heated
WARNING!
Seals that have to tolerate high temperatures may be made
of fluor rubber (fluoro-carbon rubber). At very high temper-
atures, fluor rubber (fluoro-carbon rubber) may generate
compounds that are very corrosive to the skin and lungs.
Use suitable protective equipment.
When handling a machine which has been damaged by fire or

been exposed to other intense heat, the following protective
steps must under all circumstances be taken:
Use thick, gloves made of rubber and wear protective goggles.
Discard gloves, rags etc. that been in contact with heated
fluoro-carbon rubber after having first washed them in lime wa-
ter (a solution by calcium hydroxide, i.e. slaked lime in water)
The area around a part that has been very hot and which may
be made of fluoro-carbon rubber must be decontaminated
through thorough and ample washing with lime water.
As a precautionary measure all seals (O-rings and other oil
seals) must be handled as if they were made from fluoro-car-
bon rubber.
The hydrofluoric acid may remain on the machine parts for sev-
eral years after a fire.
If swelling, redness or a burning sensation occurs and one sus-
pects that the cause may be contact with heated fluoro-carbon
rubber contact a medical doctor immediately. Symptoms may
not appear until after several hours without any previous warn-
ing.
The acid cannot be rinsed or washed away from the skin. In
stead treat with Hydrofluoric Acid Burn Jelly or similar before
contacting a doctor.
Refrigerant
NOTE! All types of service of the air conditioning unit must be
carried out at accredited workshops by, or under the supervi-
sion of, a person in a position of authority with certified com-
petence.
WARNING!
R134a is moderately hazardous to personal health. When
handling refrigerant, wear tight-fitting safety goggles and
protective gloves. In liquid form, the refrigerant may cause
frostbite. At high concentration in gas form, the refrigerant
may have an anaesthetic effect. At lower concentrations
the gas may have an effect primarily on the nervous sys-
tem.
The air-conditioning unit of the machine is filled with refrigerant

R134a at the factory. R134a has no damaging effect on the ozone
layer of the atmosphere, however, it contributes to the greenhouse
effect and must therefore never purposely be released into the
open air.
IMPORTANT! R134a may never be mixed with other refriger-
ants, e.g. R12, since this will cause failure of the unit.
166 Handling hazardous materials
In case of contact with escaping refrigerant, the following ac-

tions must be taken:
The gases, which are formed when refrigerant is heated may
have seriously harmful effects on lungs and the nervous sys-
tem even at low concentrations and when no smell is detecta-
ble. High concentrations have a narcotic effect. An exposed
person must be moved out of the danger area out into the open
air. Seek medical advice if there are remaining symptoms.
In liquid form, the refrigerant may cause frost-bite. Carefully
heat the injured area with lukewarm water or warm clothes.
Seek medical advice, if there are remaining symptoms.
Seek medical advice, if liquid refrigerant has come into contact
with someone's eyes.
If a leak is suspected, leave the dangerous area and contact an
accredited workshop to obtain information about what action
should be taken.
Batteries
WARNING!
Handling of batteries may lead to electrolyte (battery acid)
coming into contact with eyes, skin, or clothes. Use suita-
ble protective equipment. In case of acid splash in the eyes,
rinse the eyes immediately with water. Electrolyte spilled
on skin must be washed off immediately with soap and
water. Seek medical advice.
Do not smoke near batteries, as these give off explosive gases.

Make sure that metal objects, e.g. tools, rings and watch straps,
do not come into contact with the battery pole studs.
Make sure that the battery terminals' caps always are installed.
Do not tilt a battery in any direction. Battery electrolyte may leak
out.
Do not connect a discharged battery in series with a fully
charged battery. Risk of explosion.
When removing a battery, disconnect the ground cable first and
when installing, connect the ground cable last to reduce the risk
of sparks.
Discarded batteries must be taken care of according to current
national regulations.
Charging batteries, see page 185.
Starting with booster batteries, see page 102.
Handling hazardous materials 167
Dust of crystalline silicon dioxide (silica dust)
WARNING!
Work in conditions with health-hazardous dust, e.g., asbes-
tos, may cause serious health problems. Special actions
must be taken to prevent spreading of dust. Contact a work-
shop authorised by Volvo CE for more information.
Crystalline silicon dioxide is a basic component part of sand and

granite. Many activities on building sites and in mines, such as
ditching, sawing and drilling, generate dust that contains crystal-
line silicon dioxide. This dust may cause silicosis (miner's con-
sumption).
The employer or the management of the work site should inform
the operator about any occurrence of crystalline silicon dioxide on
the work site and provide special work instructions, necessary pro-
tective equipment and what actions are to be taken.
Also check local/national regulations regarding crystalline silicon
dioxide and silicosis.
Asbestos dust
It is important that the cab is kept free from dust / asbestos dust
as far as possible:
Enter and leave the machine in a place away from the as-
bestos contaminated area.
Keep clothes and shoes clean from dust.
Tidy and vacuum-clean the cab often and use personal
protective equipment, for instance respirator (dust mask)
intended for asbestos contaminated areas.
Make sure that the cab door is kept closed while operat-
ing.
The cab should be ventilated through its ventilation system,
which also provides excess pressure in the cab.
With regard to risks to health and environment, used filters
must be placed in the sealable plastic bag which is supplied to-
gether with new filters. The bag with the used filter should then
be deposited at a place authorised to take care of asbestos
waste.
168
Service and maintenance
169

Lubrication and service chart
This section of the operating instructions describes the mainte-
nance work that can be carried out by the operator. This is sum-
marized in the section "Lubrication and service chart" as an
illustration with associated table for each interval, see page 210.
Other work requires trained service personnel or special equip-
ment. Contact a workshop authorized by Volvo CE for learn more
about these.
Service journal
The service journal shall be filled in after every completed service
at a workshop authorized by Volvo CE, see page 249. The service
journal is a valuable document that can be used when, e.g., selling
the machine.
L52168B
Arrival and Delivery Inspection
Before the machine leaves the factory, it is tested and adjusted.
The dealer must also, if the warranty is to apply, carry out "Arrival
and delivery inspections" according to applicable form.
Delivery Instructions
When handing the machine over, the dealer must give the buyer
"Delivery instructions" according to applicable form, which must be
DELIVE
DE VERY
INS RUCTIONS
INSTRU NS
Machines manufactur ed by Construct ion Equipment
signed, if the warranty is to apply.
Volvo Construc tion Equipment
Machine model Serial no. Owner Customer no. Page
1 (2)
Delivery instruction carriedout on the Operator(Recipient)
The inspection programme “Delivery Instructions” is to be used for checking the machine with the customer/owner and for presenting the
Service programme
machine to the customer/owner.
Please pay atten tio n to the safety an d en viron mental ins truc tio ns in Op erator´s and Service Man uals for
th e mach in es conc erned.
Performing, sign ing and submitti ng the delivery inst ruct ions is a pre-condit ion for a valid
ARRIVAL
AR L AND
AN machine warrant y. Perfo rmed
DELIVE
DE VERY INSPEC
ECTI
TION
ON 1 Check together with the owner/operator that the delivered machine corresponds to the order.
Machines manufactur ed by Construct ion Equipment
The service programme is available at the workshop and includes

Volvo Construc tion Equipment 2 Presentation of the machine including optional equipment.
Machine Model Serial no. Operating hours Arrival date Delivery date Page
1 (2)
Review o f the Operator ’s Manual with e mphasis on the following point s.
Arriv al inspection by Delivery inspection by (Depending on machine type, certain points are omitted.)
Dealer Perfo rmed
all service and maintenance jobs, both those that can be done by
3 Opera tion
The inspection programme “Arrival and Delivery Inspection” is to be used as a check on a machine upon its arrival from the factory and for an
inspection before its delivery to the customer. – Running-in instructions.
– Cab, instruments and operating controls.
Please pay atten tio n to the safety an d en viron mental ins truc tio ns in Op erator´s and Service Man uals for
th e mach in es conc erned. – Contronic functions.
MAINTENANCE OF
STORED MACHINES
Machiines manufactured by
Volvo Construc tion Equipment
Arri val inspection
Construct ion Equipment
– Start/stop, warming up.
The arrival inspection is the first check of the product–after
1 Any deviations or transport damage must be reported

Transmission,
transport. shifting gears.
– Retarderto thefunction.
carrier, and then immediate correc-
Perfo rmed the operator and those that should be done in the workshop.
tive actions must be Customertaken.no. Page
Machine model Serial no. Owner
– Service brakes and parking brake.
1 (2)
The Service Programme should be used in connection with war-

2 Check that the machine is equipped according to– the order confirmation,
Steering, and that tools and man-
secondary steering.
Delivery instruction carriedout on the uals are supplied with the machine. Any deviations should be reported to the sales department.
Operator(Recipient)
– Operator environment, heating, ventilation and air conditioning.

3 Check that no caps for the oil filler points, fuel tanks, radiator or expansion tank are missing, in
The inspection programme “Delivery Instructions” is to be used for checking incorrectthe machine withorthe
position customer/owner
broken. and for presenting
When applicable, check thethat no caps
– Attachment for the
bracket brake, clutch
(attaching fluid reser-and use of attachments.
an attachment)
machine to the customer/owner.
voirs and washer fluid are missing.
ranty inspections and during maintenance carried out by a work-

– Loading, digging, dumping, lifting and grading operations.
4 As soon
Please pay atten tio n to the safety an d en viron mental astio
ins truc possible
ns in Opafter the and
erator´s machine hasMan
Service beenualstransported
for it should be washed with fresh water.
th e mach in es conc erned. – Operation on a public road.
5 After the inspection, the anti-corrosion treatment of the machine should be renewed. If it is to be
stored again for a longer period, follow the instructions – Towing. in "MAINTENANCE OF STORED
Performing, sign ing and submitti ng the delivery inst ruct ions is a pre-condit ion for a valid
MACHINES". – Tyre pressure.
shop authorised by Volvo CE.

machine warrant y. Perfo rmed
Delive ry inspe ction 4 Service, maint enance
1 Check together with the owner/operator that theThe delivered
delivery machine corresponds
inspection is a checktobefore
the order.
the product is delivered to the customer. Perfo rmed
Engine, cooling system and fuel system.
2 Presentation of the machine including optional equipment. 6 Check the engine coolant level and the oil level in the engine, transmission, axles and hydraulic
system. Check the freezing point of the coolant. When Electrical system including
applicable, check thebattery
level instate of charging
all brake fluid and starting with booster batteries (jump start-
reservoirs. Check the water level in the windscreen ing).washer system. See the Operator’s Manual.
Review o f the Operator ’s Manual with e mphasis on the following point s. Note: Do not start engine with battery charger connected.
(Depending on machine type, certain points are omitted.) 7 Remove transport protection from the hydraulic cylinders.
The intervals recommended between checks, oil changes and lu-

Perfo rmed
Clean any anti-corrosion agent from the piston rods. Power transmission / axles.
3 Opera tion
8 Check and adjust tyre pressure or on excavatorsBrake checksystem.
the track slack adjustment.
– Running-in instructions.
9 Start the engine and run the machine until normal operating temperature has been reached.
– Cab, instruments and operating controls.
Check that the following systems function normally:
brication apply provided that the machine is used under normal en-
Volvo Construction Equipment Customer Support AB Please esnd commentsaboutthe Inpection Programm
e to
– Contronic functions. – Electrical system: Check that instruments,SE-631 control lamps and other lights are working.
85 Eskilstuna sp@volvo.com
Sweden
– Brake system: Test the service brakes, parking/emergency brakes and engage the retarder
– Start/stop, warming up. (where applicable).
– Steering system: Turn the steering wheel to both full steering lock positions. When applicable,
– Transmission, shifting gears. check electrical secondary steering function. On Motor Graders, lean the front wheels left and
vironmental and operating conditions.

– Retarder function. right.
– Hydraulic system: Run all hydraulic cylinders to their respective end position.
– Service brakes and parking brake.
– Steering, secondary steering.
Check all equipment and functions.
10 Check that there are no fuel, water or oil leaks. If necessary, check-tighten connections, clamps
1015444
and fittings.
– Operator environment, heating, ventilation and air conditioning.
11 Any malfunctions or defects must be corrected, noted and reported to the supervisor.
– Attachment bracket (attaching an attachment) and See
use page
of attachments.
Warranty Inspection
2.
– Loading, digging, dumping, lifting and grading 12
operations.
Turn off the battery disconnect switch.
– Operation on a public road.
Volvo Construction Equipment Customer Support AB Please send com
ments about the Inspection Programm
e to
– Towing. SE-631 85 Eskilstuna sp@volvo.com
Sweden
– Tyre pressure.
4 Service, maint enance
Engine, cooling system and fuel system.
Electrical system including battery state of charging and starting with booster batteries (jump start-
ing).
Two Warranty Inspections should be carried out at an authorised
dealer workshop. The first within 100 operating hours and the sec-
Note: Do not start engine with battery charger connected.
Power transmission / axles.
Brake system.
Volvo Construction Equipment Customer Support AB

SE-631 85 Eskilstuna
Sweden
Please esnd commentsaboutthe Inpection Programm
sp@volvo.com
e to
ond at the latest at 1000 operating hours.

The carrying out of these warranty inspections is a condition for the
warranty to apply.
During these inspections, oil and other liquids have to be changed
before the end of the regular intervals.
170
Cleaning the machine

The machine should be cleaned regularly with conventional car
care products in order to eliminate the risk of damage to the paint
finish and other surfaces on the machine.
IMPORTANT! Avoid using strong cleaning agents or chemi-
cals in order to minimise the risk of damage to the paint fin-
ish.
NOTE! Daily clean the areas on the machine where dust, chips
and similar may collect in order to minimise the risk of fire,
see page 171.
Recommendations for cleaning the machine:
Place the machine in a place intended for cleaning.
Follow the instructions supplied with the car care product.
The water temperature must not exceed 60 °C (140 °F).
If high-pressure wash is used, keep a distance of at least 20
30 cm (812 in) between nozzle and machine surface. Too high
push and too short distance may cause damage. Protect elec-
trical leads in an appropriate way.
IMPORTANT! If you are using a high-pressure wash, take
care so that the decals do not loosen.
Use a soft sponge.
Finish by rinsing the whole machine with only water.
Always lubricate the machine after washing.
Touch-up the paint finish when required.
Paint finish maintenance

Machines which are used in corrosive environment are more
prone to rusting than others. As a preventive measure it is recom-
mended that the paint finish should be maintained every sixth
months. If there is any doubt whether an environment is corrosive
or not, contact your dealer.
At first clean the machine.
Apply Dinol 77B (or corresponding transparent waxy anti-rust
agent) at a thickness of 7080 μ.
A protective layer of underseal Dinol 447 (or corresponding)
may be applied under the mudguards where mechanical wear
is expected.
Touch-up painting
At first clean the machine.
Check if any areas of the paint finish are damaged.
Rectify any damage to paint finish in a professional way.
171
Cleaning, engine compartment

Machines operating in dusty, fire-hazardous environments, e.g.,
1 2 log handling, woodchip handling, grain handling, and animal feed
3
industries, require daily inspection and cleaning of the engine
4 compartment and surrounding areas.
When operating in other environments, inspection and cleaning is
required at least once a week.
5
6
7 WARNING!
Always turn off the engine and let it cool before cleaning
the machine.
Preferably, the machine should be cleaned at the end of the

work shift before it is parked.
1016394
Use personal protective equipment such as protective goggles,
Areas that need checking and cleaning: gloves, and protective breathing equipment.
1 The hydraulic tank top Start with the highest areas on the machine and finish with the
2 Air intake, engine (air-cooled alternator) lowest on top of the fuel tank and areas near the fuel tank.
3 Inside engine covers on both sides, accumu- Loose material is removed with, e.g., compressed air.
lation on the engine valve cover and other After cleaning, check and repair any leaks. Close all covers and
surfaces, particularly on hot surfaces such hoods.
as silencer, turbocharger, exhaust pipe, ex-
haust manifold, preheating element and al-
ternator.
Also check and clean by starter motor, oil fill-
ing point, oil filter and fuel filter
4 The space between engine and radiator
5 Inside radiator casing
6 Fuel filling point
7 The top of the fuel tank and surrounding ar-
eas
1016395
2 3 4 1016396
(Principle diagram) (Principle diagram)

1 Silencer 5 Preheating element
2 Turbocharger 6 Alternator
3 Exhaust pipe
4 Exhaust manifold
172 Service points
Service points
1026969
1026970
1 Level sight glass, hydraulic oil 15 Filling point for engine oil
2 Breather filters, transmission and hydraulic oil 16 Secondary fuel filter
3 Air cleaner 17 Primary fuel filter and water trap
4 Air filter intake 18 Battery
5 Filling point, fuel 19 Battery disconnect switch
6 Breather filter, front axle 20 Expansion tank
7 Level sight glass, transmission 21 Filling point, washer fluid (in the tool-box)
8 Filling point, transmission 22 Filling point and return oil filter, hydraulic system
9 Draining, hydraulic oil 23 Ventilation filters, cab
10 Breather filter, rear axle 24 Battery
11 Breather filter, fuel system 25 Alternator belt, right side
Belt for coolant pump and fuel feed pump, left side
Compressor belt, left side (optional equipment)
12 Oil dipstick, engine 26 Suction strainer, transmission
13 Oil filter, engine 27 Oil filter, transmission
14 Draining, engine oil and coolant
Engine 173
Engine
Engine oil, checking
Check the oil level every 50 hours.
When checking the machine should stand on level ground.
The check should be carried out when the oil is cold and has
A B had time to run down to the bottom of the sump.
The level should be within the marks on the oil dipstick.
Engine oil, changing

Change oil every 500 hours or at least once a year.
The conditions for the 500 hour interval between oil changes are
that:
the oil filter is replaced every time the oil is changed.
the oil filters are genuine Volvo "long life" filters and "bypass" fil-
ter.
the diesel fuel sulphur content does not exceed 0.3 % by
1020365 weight.
A Oil dipstick the correct oil viscosity for the ambient air temperature is se-
lected according to diagram, see page 215.
B Filler pipe
the oil is of a certain quality grade, see page 216.
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, the recommended
change interval shall be followed according to the oil's grade
classification and the sulphur content of the fuel, see page
216.
If any of these conditions are not met, the oil should be changed
and the filters replaced every 250 hours.
If the diesel fuel sulphur content exceeds 0.5 percent by weight or
if the oil grade is below ACEA-E3 or API CE the oil should be
changed every 125 hours.
NOTE! Interval shorter than 500 hours also means shorter in-
terval for replacing fuel filters, see page 176.
Draining
A
WARNING!
Take care when changing oil, as hot oil can cause burns to
unprotected skin.
Drain the oil while the engine is still warm.

1 The draining points for engine oil and coolant are positioned
under the machine, inside the rear left wheel.
1026927 2 Unscrew the protecting cover for the engine oil draining point,
connect the draining hose and drain into a suitable vessel.
A Draining point, engine oil Remove the hose and re-install the protecting cover.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an environmentally safe way,
see page 161.
Filling
Fill with oil through filler pipe (B).
Oil capacity when changing: approx. 20 litres (5.3 US gal) in-
cluding filter.
Oil quality grades, see page 216.
174 Engine
Engine oil filters, replacing

Replace the oil filter every time the oil is changed.
The oil filter is of the disposable type, i.e. it cannot be cleaned, but
must be replaced.
Removing
Use a filter clamp or loosen the centre bolt (depending on
filter type).
Installing
Fill the filter with oil and apply oil to the gasket.
1020366 Screw on the filter until the gasket just touches the sealing
surface. Then tighten a further half of a turn by hand.
Engine oil filter Start the engine and check that the gaskets seal. If it does
not, remove the filter and check the sealing surface. Usu-
ally it does not help to tighten harder.
NOTE! After replacing oil filters, the engine must run at low
idling for at least one minute to make sure that the engine is
lubricated before the machine is put to work.

see page 161.
IMPORTANT! It is important that the filter is filled with oil

before it is installed. This is to ensure lubrication of the
engine immediately it is started.
Fuel system 175
Fuel system
Fuel filling point
Clean fuel is essential for trouble-free running of the diesel engine.
Carefully clean around the filler cap before removing it.
Avoid spills when filling. Keep the top of the fuel tank clean.
Saw dust, dust, and dirt drenched in diesel on top of the tank
are all serious fire hazards!
During the cold season keep the fuel tank full to prevent water
condensing in the tank.
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 269 litres (71.0 US gal).
L67709A Fuel quality, see page 217.
Fuel tank cap
Fuel system, air bleeding

1 First, make sure that there is sufficient fuel in the fuel tank.
2 Press in and turn the hand pump counter-clockwise until it is in
a working position.
A 3 Pump with the hand pump until a resistance becomes noticea-
ble, 150200 strokes.
4 Lock the hand pump by pressing it in and turning it clockwise.
5 Start the engine and leave it running at low idling for at least 10
minutes to purge the system of any remaining air.
6 If the engine is difficult to start, again pump with the hand pump
until a resistance is felt.
7 After start, check that there are no leaks.
The hand pump must not be used when the engine is running.
see page 161.
1020588
A Hand pump on filter head

176 Fuel system
Fuel filter, replacing

Replace fuel filters (primary and secondary filters) every 500
hours, or when replacing the engine oil filter, which may mean
a shorter interval.
NOTE! If the filters become clogged earlier, they must be re-
placed.
The fuel filters are positioned inside the engine cover on the left
side of the machine.
The primary fuel filter and the water trap are integrated to form one
unit. In the filter head there is a hand pump which is used when
bleeding the system. The primary fuel filter works as a prefilter for
the feed pump.
When installing the filters, they should only be tightened by hand.
The fuel system must be bled after filter replacement.
The way the fuel flows is:

1020367
tank hand pump primary fuel filter with water trap feed
Primary fuel filter with water trap pump secondary fuel filter common rail injectors cylinders
The feed pump is belt-driven. The belt is in common with the cool-
ant pump. For checking and adjusting belt tension, see page 183.

see page 161.
1020368
A Secondary fuel filter

Fuel system 177
Water trap
Drain the water trap every 250 hours or when the message
Water in fuel - empty cup is shown on the display, see page
49.
Draining water from the fuel has to be done by hand.
A non-return valve in the filter head prevents the fuel from running
back to the tank.
1 Place the end of the hose in a collecting vessel
2 Loosen the draining nipple until fuel runs out through the hose.
3 Tighten the draining nipple after draining is completed.

see page 161.
A 1020369
A Draining nipple with hose

178 Fuel system
Fuel prefilter, changing

Change the filter insert every 250 hours. More frequent
changes may be necessary depending on fuel consumption
and fuel quality.
Change may also take place in connection with changing pri-
mary and secondary fuel filters after alarm for clogged filter,
see page 49.
Draining
Drain the filter daily. Draining should also take place when
draining the water trap after alarm for water in fuel, see page
49.
1 Drain the water cup of water and any other impurities by turning
1052819 the valve at the bottom of the filter. Collect the water in a con-
Fuel prefilter tainer.
2 Turn back the valve when only clean fuel runs out.
Removing and cleaning

1 Remove the filter cap by turning the T-handle counter-clock-
wise.
2 Carefully remove the filter insert with a twisting movement.
3 Clean the water cup with soapy water on a clean, soft rag or a
brush. Do not use solvents or abrasive cleaners.
4 Rinse and dry the water cup thoroughly.
Installing
5 Install the new filter insert and press it down all the way to the
bottom.
6 Fill with clean diesel fuel all the way up.
7 Change the gasket for the cap and the T-handle's O-ring if
needed. Smear diesel on the gasket and the O-ring.
Install the filter cap with the T-handle.
Breather filter, fuel system

Replace the filter every 2000 hours.
The filter is positioned inside the engine cover on the left side of
the machine.

see page 161.
1020371
Breather filter, fuel system

Engine air cleaner 179
Engine air cleaner

The degree of engine wear depends largely on the cleanliness of
the induction air. The air cleaner prevents dust and other impurities
from entering the engine. Therefore, it is very important that the air
cleaner should be checked regularly and maintained correctly.
Air cleaner
Engine air cleaner's main filter, cleaning

and changing
When the alarm text for clogged engine air filter is shown or
every 1000 hours, the filter should be replaced or cleaned.
The period of operation between filter replacements varies
depending on the working environment of the machine. In
certain environments the filter needs to be replaced more of-
ten.
The filter can be cleaned according to instructions obtainable
from an authorised dealer workshop. However, after the filter
has been cleaned five times or if it is damaged, it must be re-
placed.
NOTE! Make a mark on the decal at the end of the secondary
filter every time the primary filter is replaced or cleaned.
Primary filter
In connection with replacing the filter, the cover for the air
cleaner should also be cleaned as this works as a container for
particles which have not been trapped in the filter.
Check that all hose and pipe connections from the air cleaner
to the engine induction manifold are tight. Check-tighten hose
clips.
If the alarm text remains after replacing the primary filter, also
the secondary filter must be replaced, see page 179.
Do not, under any circumstances, run the engine without a fil-
ter or with a damaged one.
Always have a spare filter at hand and keep the filter well pro-
tected from dirt.
Engine air cleaner's secondary filter,

changing
Replace the filter every 2000 hours or when the primary filter
has been replaced three times.
The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be replaced.
The secondary filter works as a protective filter if the primary filter
is damaged.
NOTE! Never remove the secondary filter unless it is to be re-
placed.
Secondary filter see page 161.
180 Oil-bath air cleaner (optional equipment)
Oil-bath air cleaner

When working in a particularly dusty environment, we recommend
that an oil-bath air cleaner should be installed in series with the ex-
isting dry-filter air cleaner. This will provide further safety against
damage to the engine.
The particle-retaining ability of the oil-bath air cleaner is between
90 and 95 %, which in practice, means that the standard dry-filter
air cleaner will act as a secondary filter, with a replacement interval
which is twice as long, i.e. 2000 hours
Oil-bath air cleaner, checking

L66719A
Check the oil level daily.
Oil bath air cleaner
Change oil and clean the lower and upper steel mesh filters if:
the oil is dirty and viscous.
there are sludge deposits or dry spots on the underside of the low-
er steel mesh filter.
Oil-bath air cleaner, cleaning

Clean the steel mesh filters inserts every 2000 hours.
The oil bowl, the lower and upper steel mesh filters should be
washed in diesel fuel.
Avoid using petrol (gasoline) for cleaning, as any remaining
petrol can cause the engine to surge when it is started later.
Oil-bath air cleaner, changing oil

When filling or changing oil use oil with the same viscosity as in
the engine.
The total oil volume is 5.5 litres (1.5 US gal).
Cooling system 181
Cooling system
Coolant
The cooling system is filled with Volvo Coolant VCS, which is in ac-
cordance with the highest requirements regarding anti-freeze,
anti-corrosion and anti-cavitation properties. To avoid damage to
the engine, is it very important that Volvo Coolant VCS is used
when topping up or when changing coolant.
Volvo Coolant VCS is yellow and a decal at the point of filling
shows that the system is filled with this coolant (see figure).
IMPORTANT! Volvo Coolant VCS must not be mixed with
another coolant or corrosion protection, as this may cause
engine damage.
11445056
1020820 If concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS and clean water (see page
218) is used, the table below shows the approximate amount of
concentrated coolant that is required to achieve freeze protection.
The amount of Volvo Coolant VCS must never be less than 40 %
of the total mixture.
When there is doubt as to the quality of the water, ready-mixed Vol-
vo Coolant VCS, which contains 40 % concentrated coolant, must
be used.
IMPORTANT! If the ready-mixed Volvo Coolant VCS is used,
it must not be mixed with any other ready-mixed coolants, as
this may cause damage to the engine.
Freeze protection down to Content of concentrated coolant

25 °C (13 °F) 40% (mixture from factory)
35 °C (31 °F) 50 %
46 °C (51 °F) 60 %

see page 161.
Coolant, checking
Check the coolant level every 50 hours.
The level should stand between the Max. and Min. marks on the
expansion tank.
Expansion tank
182 Cooling system
Coolant, changing
WARNING!
Risk of scalding when opening the expansion tank's cap
(radiator cap) due to high pressure in the cooling system.
IMPORTANT! Change coolant every 6000 hours or at least

every fourth year. Failure to change coolant will cause clog-
ging of the cooling system and the risk of engine damage.
IMPORTANT! Volvo Coolant VCS must not be mixed with any
other coolants or corrosion protection agents, as this may
cause engine damage.
Draining
1 Remove the cap on the expansion tank, positioned on top of the
engine hood.
2 The draining points for engine oil and coolant (A) are positioned
under the machine, inside the rear left wheel.
3 Unscrew the protecting cover for the coolant draining point,
connect the draining hose and drain into a suitable vessel. Re-
1004312
move the hose and re-install the protecting cover.
Cap on expansion tank
Cooling system capacity when changing: approx. 38 litres
(10.0 US gal)
see page 161.
Filling
IMPORTANT! To avoid damage to engine and cooling sys-
A tem, different coolants or corrosion protection may not be
mixed, see page 181.
Filling with coolant is done through the expansion tank.
1 The engine should not be running and the temperature control
set to warm.
2 Fill with coolant to the maximum mark on the expansion tank.
NOTE! The cooling system operates at high pressure. Make
sure that the cap's seals are intact and tighten the cap secure-
1026928 ly.
Draining, coolant 3 Run the engine until it is warm and top up the coolant level until
all air has been removed from the system.
4 The level should be checked after the engine has been run
warm and then allowed to cool.
NOTE! The system can also be filled through the draining nip-
ple.
IMPORTANT! Never fill a hot engine with cold coolant, as this

may cause the cylinder block or the cylinder head to crack.
Failure to change coolant will cause clogging of the cooling
system and the risk of engine damage.
Cooling system 183
A Fan belt, checking (workshop job)

Check the belt tension every 500 hours.
WARNING!
The engine must be stationary when checking the belt ten-
sion rotating parts can cause injuries.
Belt tension, checking and adjusting

The belt also drives the fuel feed pump for the fuel system. Loosen
the bolts (A and B). The belt is adjusted with the aid of the oblong
hole by bolt B. At correct tension, it should be possible to deflect
1004314
the belt approx. 15 mm (0.6 in) applying a fairly hard pressure.
B Then tighten down the bolts.
B
Radiator, cleaning
A
The radiator should be cleaned at regular intervals in order to safe-
B guard the cooling of the engine. When operating under especially
dusty conditions, the radiator should be checked daily.
D WARNING!
The engine must always be off when cleaning the radiator.
C NOTE! The radiator core may be damaged if handled care-

lessly.
1020372
A Engine cover 1 Swing up the radiator casing (B).

B Radiator casing 2 Open the engine covers (A).
C Cooling fan 3 Open the side covers (D) by the cooling fan (C).
D Side cover 4 Blow the radiator clean with compressed air from the inside,
(cooling fan side).
5 Check and clean the outside of the radiator.
6 Close all covers and lower the radiator casing.
Reversible fan, cleaning

In very dirty environments it may be a good idea to clean the radi-
ator often. If the machine is equipped with a reversible cooling fan,
the fan can be made to temporarily change direction to blow the
radiator clean at set intervals.
To check the setting of the reversible cooling fan, see menu on the
display on page 31.
Setting is carried out with the keyboard under menu Engine, page
30.
184 Electrical system
Electrical system
Check the travelling lights and control lamps daily.
Batteries
The batteries are two 12 V batteries which are connected in series
providing a system voltage of 24 V.
1003912
Battery disconnect switch

The battery disconnect switch is located inside the cover on the ra-
diator casing. If the machine is to be left unattended for some time,
the battery disconnect switch should be turned off.
Battery disconnect switch
Batteries, maintenance
Check the electrolyte level every 250 hours (more often at
temperatures above +15 °C = +59 °F).
The level should be approx. 10 mm (0.4 in) above the cell
plates.
Top up with distilled water when required.
Check that the cable terminals and pole studs are clean, well
tightened and coated with petroleum jelly or similar.
The state of charge of the batteries is checked with a hydrometer.

When there is a risk of frost, it is very important that the batteries
do not become discharged as the electrolyte in a discharged bat-
tery is more likely to freeze and so destroy the battery.
See also page 164.

Electrical system 185
Batteries, charging
WARNING!
Always remove the cell caps during rapid charging of the
batteries. When a battery is being charged an explosive
mixture of oxygen and hydrogen is formed. A short circuit,
an open flame or a spark in the neighbourhood of the bat-
tery can cause a powerful explosion. Always switch off the
charging current before the charging lead clips are discon-
L64558A nected. Ventilate well, especially if the battery is charged in
a confined space. The battery electrolyte contains corro-
sive sulphuric acid. Electrolyte spilled on bare skin must be
removed immediately. Wash with soap and plenty of water.
If you get splashes of electrolyte in your eyes or on any
other sensitive part of your body, at once rinse with plenty
of water and seek medical advice immediately.
1 Connect
2 Charge
3 Operate
Electrical distribution box

Relays and fuses are positioned in the electrical distribution box
behind the operator seat and become accessible after the cover
for the electrical distribution box has been opened. A decal on the
inside of the cover shows which current consuming device is con-
nected to the respective relay and fuse.
Never install a fuse with a higher rating than that given on the
decal (there is a risk of damage or fire on the circuit board).
If a fault should arise in one of the relays, this can be temporarily
remedied by replacing the faulty relay with another relay which has
a less important function.
Welding
:
The following actions must be taken before starting electric weld-
ing on the machine or on attachments connected to the machine:
1 Turn off the battery disconnect switch.
2 Disconnect the batteries, both plus and minus terminals.
3 Unplug the electronic control units. For further information, con-
tact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
4 Connect the welder's ground connection as close as possible
to the welding point, and make sure that the current does not
pass through a bearing.
See also page 162.
Alternator belt, checking (workshop job)

WARNING!
Checking and adjusting

1 Loosen bolts (B) and adjust with adjusting screw (A) until the
correct belt tension is obtained. At correct tension, it should be
possible to deflect the belt approx. 15 mm (0.6 in) applying a
fairly hard pressure.
2 Then lock with bolts (B).
The alternator installation is sensitive to faulty connection,

therefore always follow the instructions below:
Disconnecting battery
Battery and alternator cables must not be disconnected while
the engine is running. This can damage the alternator.
Disconnect and insulate the battery cables before carrying out
any work on the alternator equipment.
Battery connection
The connecting terminals on the batteries must under no cir-
cumstances be confused. The respective pole studs have a
stamped-in + or sign. If the cables are wrongly connected, the
alternator rectifier is destroyed immediately.
Alternator with air filter

1000755
Air filter, alternator Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an environmentally safe way,

see page 161.
Headlamps, adjusting
The headlight adjustment is of great importance in order to avoid
dazzling on-coming traffic. The headlights are of the asymmetrical
type, which means that one has to take extra care when adjusting.
Place the machine, which must not be loaded, on level ground at
right angles to a wall or similar.
Adjust the upper boundary (H) of the low beams at a distance of
(L) from the headlamps. Check the distance (Y) between the cen-
tres of the beams with the high beams switched on. The distance
should be the same as between the headlamps on the machine.
H X
L R
L69004A
Adjusting measurements L110F/L120F

L = 5000 mm (16 ft 4.8 in)
H = 0.85 multiplied by (1385 mm (4 ft 6.5 in) + R)
Y = 1980 mm ((6 ft 6.0 in)
X = 1385 mm (4 ft 6.5 in)
R = The distance from the floor / the ground to the centre of the front wheel hub
Relays and fuses

Relays and fuses are positioned in the electrical distribution box
behind the operator seat and become accessible after the cover
for the electrical distribution box has been opened. A decal on the
inside of the cover shows which current consuming device is con-
nected to the respective relay and fuse.
Never install a fuse with a higher rating than that given on the
decal (there is a risk of damage or fire on the circuit board).
If a fault should arise in one of the relays, this can be temporarily
remedied by replacing the faulty relay with another relay which has
a less important function.
Bulb, changing
Replacing light bulb, HID
Replacement of bulbs or other work on the working lights should
be carried out at a workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
IMPORTANT! The bulb contains mercury. When replaced, it
should therefore be taken care of according to local regula-
tions for dangerous waste.
Working lights by cab roof, HID

If the machine as an option is equipped with working lights which
have a bulb of the HID type (High Intensity gas Discharge lamp),
the following applies:
WARNING!
The bulb stores energy after it has been turned off. Wait for
at least five minutes after it has been turned off before
touching the bulb.
Transmission 189
Transmission
Transmission oil level, checking
Check the oil level when the machine is warm every 500
hours.
When checking, the machine should stand on level ground, with
the gear selector in neutral position and applied parking brake.
When checking the oil with the engine running and the machine at
operating temperature, the level should be between the markings
High and Low on the lower part of the glass.
LOW
HIGH
LOW
Transmission oil, changing
Change oil every 2000 hours.
WARNING!
1027005
Level sight glass, transmission oil

unprotected skin.
The oil is drained at the drain plug.
Fill with oil through the filler pipe.
Oil capacity when changing: approx. 38 litres (10.0 US gal)

see page 161.
Filler pipe, transmission oil

190 Transmission
Transmission, changing oil filter

The oil filter is of the "spin on" type and is accessible from under-
neath on the left side of machine.
L66462A
Oil filter, transmission
Transmission breather filter, changing

The filter is combined with the filter for the hydraulic oil tank.

see page 161.
Transmission, cleaning suction filter

A Clean the filter every 2000 hours.
The suction filter is located in the bottom of the transmission hous-
ing.
1 Remove the cover and clean.
2 Install a new gasket between cover and transmission housing.
3 Also change the O-ring on the suction filter's connecting pipe.
4 Fill oil.
5 Check that there are no leaks.
B
1004318
A Drain plug
B Cover, suction filter
Axles 191
Axles
Axle oil, changing
Change the oil every 2000 hours. A first oil change should
WARNING!
unprotected skin.
Front axle
take place at the 1000 hour warranty inspection.
A Level check and filling
B Draining
Draining
Drain the oil from axle (B) and hub (C) respectively.
see page 161.
A
Filling
Operate the machine for a few minutes after filling. Check the level
again, top up if needed.
B
Axles, capacities
L67011A
Oil capacity front axle when changing, 36 litres (9.5 US gal)
(incl. differential carrier assembly and hubs).
Rear axle
Oil capacity rear axle when changing, 41 litres (10.8 US gal)
A Level check and filling (incl. differential carrier assembly and hubs).
B Drain point
Rear axle bearing

Check the oil level every 500 hours.
Change oil in the front rear axle bearing every 4000 hours.
C The rear rear axle bearing is maintenance-free.
L63534B
Propeller shafts and back-up bearings,
C Drain point lubrication
Lubricate propeller shaft and back-up bearing every 500
hours, see page 203.
192 Axles
Axles, changing breather filters

Front axle
The front axle breather filter is positioned inside the front cover on
the left side of the machine.
Breather filter, front axle
Rear axle
The rear axle breather filter is positioned inside the engine cover
on the right side of the machine.

see page 161.
1020373
Breather filter, rear axle

Brake system 193
Brake system
The brake system is all hydraulic and uses the same oil tank as the
working hydraulics and the steering system.
Checking and changing oil, see page 200.
Before opening the system or check-tightening leaking couplings
and connections, the pressure in the brake system must be re-
leased. This is done by turning off the engine and pressing down
the brake pedal repeatedly (3040 times).
WARNING!
An accumulated pressure remains in the brake system
even when the engine has been turned off. If the system is
opened without first being depressurized, high-pressure oil
will jet out.
Discarded accumulators should be taken care of by a workshop

and "punctured".
There is a risk of explosion if an accumulator is heated.
Brakes, checking
L62829D
Check brake disc wear every 1000 hours.
Cap nut on wear indicator
1 Start the engine to charge the brake system.
2 Stop the engine and apply the brake.
NOTE! The brake must be applied during the entire wear
check.
3 Remove the cap nut on the wear indicator and press in the pin
against stop. The position of the flat face on the pin indicates
how much the brake disc is worn. If the face is level with the flat
face on the nipple, the brake disc is worn out and must be re-
placed by a workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
4 Install the cap nut on the wear indicator and carry out the same
check of the other brake discs.
Brakes, air bleeding

If bleeding of the brake system is necessary, this should be done
L62829C
by a workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
Brake discs, checking Brake test, checking service brakes, see page 109.
Parking brake, checking
WARNING!
A brake test may only be carried out in an area where there
is no risk of accidents.
1 Apply the parking brake with the switch.

2 With 3rd gear engaged and engine at full speed, the machine
should remain stationary.
194 Tyres
Tyres
Tyres, checking air pressure
WARNING!
Tyres can explode when they are being inflated, which can
lead to accidents. Use a self-attaching air chuck with a hose
long enough to let you stand off to the side of the tyre, and
as far away as possible, when inflating the tyre.
Normally, follow the recommended air pressures, see page 231.

Special ground conditions may require adjustment of the air pres-
sure. Follow the tyre supplier's instructions and do not exceed the
maximum permitted air pressures.
The tyre pressure may have been raised before the machine was
delivered from the factory. Therefore, check and adjust the tyre
pressure according to recommendations, before putting the ma-
chine to work for the first time.
WARNING!
Repairs or welding on a rim with an installed and inflated
tyre may cause the rim to crack or the tyre to explode.
Change and repair jobs on tyres and rims must be done by
specially trained personnel.
The instructions stated below apply to an inflated tyre where

the pressure needs to be increased. If the tyre has lost all
pressure, a trained service engineer should be called in.
When checking the air pressure, the tyre should be cold and
the machine be without a load.
Ask all other persons to leave the danger area (in front of the
rim).
Stand by the tyre's tread. Tyre installed on a split rim may ex-
plode causing injury or in the worst case death.
Use a long air hose (with a self-attaching air chuck) which al-
lows you to stand outside the danger area.
Tyres on stored wheels (spare wheels) should be kept in a lying
down position and only be inflated sufficiently to keep the rim
parts in position.
Do not re-inflate a tyre, if the machine has been operated with
a tyre pressure that has been below 80% of the lowest recom-
mended tyre pressure according to the specifications, or if the
tyre and/or rim are obviously damaged or are suspected of be-
ing damaged.
Wheel bolts, check-tightening

After having changed a tyre or if the wheel has been removed and
installed for any other reason, the wheel bolts must be check-tight-
ened after eight hours of operation.
Tightening torque: 600 Nm (443 lbf ft)
Cab 195
A B Cab
Cab, cleaning and changing ventilation
filter
The cab ventilation filters consist of prefilter and main filter. The
machine is often used in dusty conditions, and therefore it is deliv-
ered with filters that meet efficiency class F8 according to EN
779:2002. The filters reduce the risk of silicosis and also reduce
particles such as quartz in fine fractions, pollen, bacteria, and
mold/fungus spores. The machine is delivered with filters accord-
ing to this classification, which also is recommended when chang-
ing. Contact your dealer for further information.
Clogging of the filters depends entirely on the machine's op-
1026286 erating conditions, but the filters should be checked once a
A Pre filter week.
B Main filter (inside the plastic casing) The main filter should be replaced every 2000 hours and the
prefilter every 1000 hours.
NOTE! The interval between filter replacements can be in-
creased or reduced depending on how dusty the working en-
vironment is.
NOTE! The cab filters are only intended to separate particles
(dust) from the air. Any dangerous gases are not trapped by
the filters.
Cleaning
1 Use a respirator (face mask).
2 Open the side cover and remove the filters.
3 Shake the filters carefully without damaging them. No com-
pressed air or vacuum-cleaners.
Carbon filter (optional equipment)

The carbon filter is a main filter intended for use in conditions
where there is a need to reduce odours from organic gases or gas-
es containing sulphur. The filter meets the same particle efficiency
class as the standard main filter.
Asbestos filter (optional equipment)

The asbestos filter is a main filter especially intended for use in
conditions where there may be asbestos dust, but of course, it is
effective against all other kinds of dust when the operator needs
highly filtered air in the cab.
The filter meets the standards according to EN 1822:1 filter class
H13. Pay attention to the national regulations regarding work in the
environment in question.
196 Cab
Operator seat, lubrication

B
If squeaking noises arise, the seat should be lubricated as shown
below:
1 Remove bolts (A).
2 Fold up seat (B).
3 Lubricate linkage (C) on both sides with oil.
4 Lubricate spring ends (D) with grease.
C 5 Remove the four plastic plugs retaining the rubber bellows and
push down the bellows, Lubricate linkages (E) on both sides
with oil.
6 Lubricate slide rails (F) on both sides with grease.
A D
L68991A
L68991B
Washer fluid reservoir

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the toolbox on the ma-
chine's right side.
Make sure that there is sufficient anti-freeze in the washer fluid
when there is a risk of frost.
Top up when necessary.
Make sure that the cap on the reservoir is securely tightened
and that the reservoir is clean on the inside.
1026931
Washer fluid reservoir

Air conditioning 197
Air conditioning
Ask personnel at a workshop authorised by Volvo CE to
check the air conditioning once a year. Rules for handling re-
frigerant, see page 165.
Compressor belt, checking and adjusting

tension (workshop job)
WARNING!
1 Loosen bolts (B) and adjust with adjusting screw (A) until the
correct belt tension is obtained. At correct tension, it should be
possible to deflect the belt approx. 15 mm (0.6 in) applying a
fairly hard pressure.
2 Then lock with bolts (B).
In order to prevent leakage and to safeguard the lubrication of the
seals in the air-conditioning compressor, the air conditioning
should be run for at least five minutes once a month.
At temperatures below freezing, 0 °C (+32 °F), the unit must

be run indoors, as the power supply to the compressor lead
is switched off by the thermostat whenever the evaporator
temperature is below +1 °C (+34 °F).
NOTE! Make sure that the exhaust gases are extracted or re-
moved by ventilation in a suitable way.
198 Air conditioning
Condenser
Cleaning
A
NOTE! High-pressure wash must not be used.
Clean the condenser at regular intervals as follows:
1 Open up the radiator casing.
2 Blow the condenser clean from underneath with compressed
air.
3 Close the radiator casing.
IMPORTANT! If the pressure in the system becomes too high
because of a clogged condenser, the air conditioning will cut
1004322
out. The condenser must first be cleaned before the system
A Condenser is restarted with the switch.
Evaporator
Cleaning
NOTE! High-pressure wash must not be used.
Clean the evaporator at regular intervals. Simpler cleaning can be
done with the evaporator in place. Use a soft brush, not com-
pressed air.
For a more thorough cleaning, the evaporator must be loosened
from its mountings and cleaned from the rear. Therefore, this ought
to be carried out at a workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
L65987D
Bucket teeth 199
Bucket teeth
WARNING!
Striking metal parts with a hammer may cause metal chips
to fly up towards the eyes or other body parts. Always use
protective eyeglasses, hard hat, and protective gloves
Special tool when working with attachments.
Bucket teeth, changing

A special tool may be ordered to facilitate replacement of teeth.
The tool are available in different sizes depending on tooth size.
Contact your dealer for further information.
Removing tooth
1 Lower the bucket to the ground and angle it slightly upward.
2 Clean the opening for tooth adapter locking device.
3 Drive out the lock device with a hammer and the special tool or
another suitable drift.
4 Remove tooth.
Knock out the locking device
Installing tooth
1 Clean the front part of the tooth adapter and the hole for the
locking device.
Locking device 2 Install the tooth so that the guide lugs fit in the tooth adapter re-
A Steel pin cesses.
B Lock retainer 3 Replace lock retainer (B) with a new part.
4 Install the locking device so that the chamfered part points
downward and the lock retainer points forward.
5 Knock down the locking device with a hammer until it is level
with the upper part of the tooth adapter.
6 Drive down the lock device further with a hammer and the spe-
cial tool or another suitable drift until the upper part is just below
the line marking in the hole.
Replace the steel pin in connection with replacement of tooth
adapter.
1019824
The locking device should be just below the

scored line.
200 Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system
The same hydraulic oil tank is used for working hydraulics, brake
and steering systems.
Any work on the system requires great demands on cleanli-
ness. Even very small particles can cause damage or clog up
the system. Therefore, wipe areas in question clean before
any work is carried out.
The pressure-limiting valves for the hydraulic system are set to the
correct value at the factory. If the valves are altered by any person
other than service personnel at a workshop authorised by Volvo
CE, the guarantee from the manufacturer will be void.
Hydraulic oil
NOTE! If the machine is provided with biologically degradable
hydraulic oil, the same type of oil must be used when topping
up and when changing hydraulic oil. Different types of biolog-
ically degradable hydraulic oils must not be mixed. Mineral oil
Oil level, hydraulic oil must not be used together with biologically degradable hy-
draulic oil. When changing from mineral oil to biologically de-
gradable hydraulic oil, contact a workshop authorised by
Volvo CE.
Hydraulic oil level, checking

Check the oil level every 250 hours. The level should stand
between the Max. and Min. marks on the level sight glass (po-
sitioned on the left side of the machine).
NOTE! The oil level should be checked when the lifting arms
are in their lowest position and with the attachment flat on the
ground.
Filling is done from the top of the hydraulic tank.
Hydraulic oil, changing

(working hydraulics, brake system, and steering system)
Change oil every 4000 hours if the system is filled with miner-
al hydraulic oil or Volvo Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46.
Change oil every 2000 hours, if the system is filled with any
other biologically degradable hydraulic oil.
NOTE! When using attached external hydraulic equipment,
e.g. road sweeper, drill, snow blower or similar, the oil should
be changed at shorter intervals, i.e. every 1000 hours.
WARNING!
unprotected skin.
Oil capacity of the hydraulic tank when changing: approx. 133

A B C 1004323 litres (35.1 US gal).
A Breather filter
B Return oil filter
C Hydraulic oil filling point
Hydraulic system 201
Draining
NOTE! Use the same hose as is used for draining the engine
oil.
Temporarily replace the rubber hose with a 3/4" inside diame-
ter hose sufficiently long to reach the collecting vessel.
The draining point is positioned behind the side plate on the left
side.
1 Operate the machine until the oil reaches normal working tem-
perature.
2 Stand the machine on level ground with the bucket (attach-
ment) lowered to the ground.
3 Stop the engine and release the pressure in the brake system
by depressing the brake pedal several times. Drain the hydrau-
lic oil via the draining point.
Draining, hydraulic oil

Hydraulic system, draining sludge
Drain sludge and condensation water from the hydraulic oil tank
via the draining point every 1000 hours.
Filling
1 Fill with oil to correct level.
2 Start the engine and operate the lifting and tilting cylinders to
both end positions.
3 Top up with oil when required.
Check that there are no leaks.

see page 161.
Hydraulic system, changing return oil filter

Replace return oil filter every 2000 hours.
1 Remove the cover.
A B C 1004323 2 Lift out and take apart the filter insert.
A Breather filter 3 Remove the filter which is of the disposable type and install a
B Return oil filter new filter. Check the seal rings when installing.
C Hydraulic oil filler point
Hydraulic system, changing breather filter

The filter should be replaced every 2000 hours.
The filter is combined with the filter for the transmission.
Accumulators, depressurizing
WARNING!
Always depressurize the hydraulic system and turn off the
electric power with the battery disconnector before starting
L66320A a job.
The pressure in the accumulators for brake system, Boom Sus-

pension System and servo system is released as shown below:
Brake system
1 Stop the engine.
2 Depress the brake pedal several times (3040 times).
Boom Suspension System (BSS)

If there is a need to depressurize the accumulators for the Boom
Suspension System, contact a workshop authorized by Volvo CE.
Servo system
1 Stop the engine.
2 Ignition switch in position 1.
3 Move the control levers forward and backward several times.
WARNING!
Discarded accumulators contain pressurized gas and may
explode. Let a workshop authorized by Volvo CE handle
discarded accumulators.
Lubrication 203
Lubrication
Bearings, greasing
The service life of bushings and pivot pins can be extended con-
siderably, if the machine is greased regularly and in the correct
way.
The greasing of bearings has two main purposes:
Add grease to the bearing to reduce friction between pin and
bushing.
Replace old grease that may contain dirt particles. The grease
in the space inside the outer seal collects dirt and prevents dirt
L63189A
and also water from penetrating into the bearing.
Wipe off grease nipples and grease gun before greasing, so
that dirt and sand is not introduced through the grease nip-
ples.
Grease the bearing until new clean grease is forced out through
the outer seal. For recommended grease, see page 217.
Between 10 and 15 strokes with a normal hand-held grease gun is
required to grease one of the bearings for the lifting arms.
204 Automatic greasing system
Automatic greasing system

The machine may be equipped with an automatic greasing system
which automatically greases many points according to a preselect-
ed lubrication cycle. The automatic greasing system should be in-
spected regularly and should be co-ordinated with other regular
maintenance and control.
Checking and adjusting grease cycles is done using the keypad
and the display unit, see page 40.
Check the following regularly:

that there is sufficient lubricant in the reservoir. Top up as
needed, see page 206.
NOTE! Too low lubricant level constitutes a great risk
of air entering the system (the most common cause of
operating problems).
that the system functions. Carry out the system test on
page 208.
that the lubricant reservoir is undamaged.
that the connections do not leak.
that the dust guards for quick-action couplings are in-
stalled and undamaged.
that the lubrication lines are undamaged and well se-
cured.
that all lubrication points are lubricated (that lubricant is
forced out at bearings and joints).
NOTE! Remember to lubricate by hand the lubrication points
which are not included in the automatic greasing system. See
the ordinary lubrication chart.
1 Pump unit with automatics

2 Battery
3 Metering block
4 Metering valve
5 V-ECU
6 Lubrication pressure sensor
7 Main line A
8 Main line B
9 Ignition switch
10 Switch
11 Control lamp
12 System testing button
13 Filling point
Automatic greasing system 205
6
4 3
8
L64489C
2 1 5 7
Lubrication points
1 Lifting frame 5 Propeller shafts, front and rear support bearings

2 Hydraulic attachment bracket 6 Frame joint bearings, upper and lower bearings
3 Lifting cylinder, front and rear bearings 7 Steering cylinder, front and rear bearings
4 Tilting cylinder, front and rear bearings 8 Bucket attachment, upper and lower attachments
Filling lubricant
Lubricant must be topped up before the level falls below the
minimum marking on the reservoir.
On the pump unit there is a filler connection (grease nipple) to
which a hand pump or an industrial pump are connected when fill-
ing.
NOTE! If and industrial pump is used, the filter between con-
nection and pump must be cleaned regularly. A partly blocked
filter can easily burst, with a consequent great risk of small
particles entering the lubrication system. This may in turn
lead to a breakdown in the lubrication system.
Proceed as follows:
1 Carefully clean the filler connection and the coupling on the fill-
er hose.
Filler connector 2 Fill the filler hose completely full with grease before beginning
to fill. This will prevent air from entering the system.
3 Remove the protective cap on the filler connection and connect
the coupling to the filler connection.
4 Fill with lubricant to the maximum level on the reservoir.*) If it is
hard to pump in the lubricant, either the filter behind the filler
connection is blocked or there may be dirt in the filler nipple it-
self. Clean the filter, if required replace the nipple and try again.
5 Re-install the protective cap.
6 Keep the lubrication pump in a dust-free place, so that it will not
be exposed to dirt.
*) If the reservoir is filled above the maximum level, the surplus lu-
bricant will be drained through the ventilation hole on the left side
of the reservoir. Any air under the plate in the reservoir is also
drained through the ventilation hole.
Automatic greasing system 207
Recommended lubricants
The system requires that the lubricant is clean and possible to
pump at the prevailing temperature. Therefore use lubricant of a
recommended NLGI class. A lower NLGI class grease, may re-
duce the lubrication effect with increased wear as a consequence.
Do not mix different types of lubricants. When changing, all lu-
bricant must be changed, not only in the reservoir.
There must be no additives of graphite or Teflon in the lubricant.
The use of molybdenum disulphide (MoS2) is only permitted if:
the lubricant is of a very high quality and does not contain
more than 5 % MoS2.
the lubrication system is regularly checked to provide reli-
able operation.
the main lines are flushed through at least once a year.
Lowest temperature Highest temperature Lubricant type, NLGI
Above 25 °C (13 °F) 80°C (176 °F) 2
Below 25 °C (13 °F) 0 °C (32 °F) 0/1
Below 25 °C (13 °F) +80 °C (176 °F) Synthetic 2
Below 25 °C (13 °F) 0 °C (32 °F) Synthetic 0 / 1
NOTE! Special tools are required for fault tracing, adjusting

and repairing the control unit. Therefore, contact qualified
service personnel when required.
Changing greasing interval

If the preselected greasing interval does not suit the operating and
loading conditions to which the machine is exposed, the interval
can be changed using the keypad and the display, see page 29.
1 Turn the ignition key to position 1 (running position).
2 Choose "Service" with the keypad.
3 Select "Central lubrication" with the arrow keys and press SE-
LECT.
4 Select "Interval" with the arrow keys and press SELECT.
5 Select the greasing interval you want to change to with the ar-
row keys and press SELECT.
6 Wait 45 seconds before turning the start key to 0 (selected in-
terval on the display may return to earlier interval, but the
change will take place after 45 seconds).
NOTE! If the ignition key is turned to position 0 within 45 sec-
onds, the latest selected lubrication cycle will be erased.
Therefore, wait for at least 45 seconds after setting before
turning the start key to position 0.
7 Turn the start key to position 0 and wait until the display shuts
down.
8 Turn the start key to position 1 (operating pos.) and check that
the correct greasing interval is shown on the display.
To change greasing interval again, the start key must be turned to
position 0. When the display has shut down, turn the start key to
position 1 again, now a new greasing interval can be chosen.
System test
In order to check the function of the greasing system, or to initiate
an extra lubrication cycle after for example the machine has been
washed, a system test can be carried out. The test button, which
is used to begin a system test, is positioned at the front on the
pump.
A test cycle can only be carried out when the pump is between two
ordinary lubrication cycles (not during an ongoing lubrication cy-
cle).
Single test lubrication cycle
The pump only carries out one lubrication cycle via one main
line. May be used after a wash in order to obtain an extra lubri-
cation cycle.
2 Press in the test button for 26 s.
3 The lubrication cycle starts.
4 The test cycle is ended automatically.
Test button If the test lubrication cycle has been used to obtain an extra
lubrication cycle after a wash, the test button should be
pressed once more to lubricate the other main line.
Continuous test lubrication cycle

The pump carries out an unlimited number of lubrication cy-
cles, i.e. it continuously pumps out lubricant alternately via the
two main lines. This is used for bleeding the system of air.
2 Press the test button for more than 6 s.
3 The lubrication cycle starts.
4 End the test cycle by turning the start key to position 0.
The test cycle does not end automatically.
A B Bleeding the system

The pump must not be activated for longer than five minutes.
1 Make sure that the lubricant reservoir has been filled up to the
max. mark.
2 Remove the plugs in metering block (C) which is furthest away
from pump unit (D).
C
4 Press the test button for more than six seconds, which will ini-
tiate a continuous test cycle.
5 When lubricant, free from air, emerges from one of main lines
A B D (B), the air bleeding is completed in that main line.
6 Turn the ignition key to the "0" position and install plug (A).
7 Follow points 36 in order to bleed the other main line.
8 Test the system using the method Single test lubrication cy-
cle, see page 207.
L68946B
Cleaning with high-pressure wash

Normally water cannot penetrate into the system. However, during
a high-pressure wash the risk increases and the pump unit should
be protected, as water, which has entered the system, does not
disappear by itself, but could instead cause operating problems.
After a high-pressure wash a Single test lubrication cycle should
be carried out to obtain extra lubrication.
Lubrication and service chart 209

Other service and maintenance jobs not included in the service and lubrication chart requires trained service per-
sonnel or special equipment. Contact a workshop authorized by Volvo CE for learn more about these.
Symbol key
The following standard symbols are used in the service and lubrication chart.
Engine Lubrication
L66544A
Transmission Grease nipple

L66542A
1027023
Hydraulic system Oil/liquid

L66543A L66627A
L66637A
Brake system L66625A
Filter
Axles Air filter

L66626A
Fuel system Level check

L66546A
L66636A
Battery L66639A
Belt tension
L66633A
Coolant Control lamps

L66629A L66638A
Draining
Air conditioning
L66632A
L66640A

Checks, oil changes and lubrication
Intervals:
Daily, 10, 50, 250, and 500 hours (symbol key, see previous page)
12 1
500h
250h
50h
10h
11 12 2
4 2 4
6
10
7
3
2
1
4
9 7 3 8
10h
50h
250h
500h
1000h 2000h 4000h 6000h 1030486
.
Item Page Measure

DAILY (every 10 hours)
1 184 Check function of control lamps
180 Check oil-bath air cleaner oil level (optional equipment)
Check travel lights, working lights, reversing alarm
EVERY 50 HOURS
After carrying out Daily service
4 173 Check engine oil level
12 181 Check coolant level
194 Check tyres (air pressure and damage) 5)
2 203 Lubricate the lifting frame lower bucket pins 1)
EVERY 250 HOURS

After carrying out Daily and 50 hour services
3 200 Check hydraulic system oil level
6 177 Drain the fuel system water trap
7 184 Check battery electrolyte level
Check for any leaks
2 203 Lubricate lifting frame 3)
8 203 Lubricate the frame joint upper bearing 3)
8 203 Lubricate the steering cylinder bearings 3)
178 Change fuel prefilter
EVERY 500 HOURS

After carrying out Daily, 50, and 250 hour services
4 173 Change engine oil and replace oil filter 2)
5 176 Replace fuel filters
11 186 Check belt tension, alternator (workshop job)
183 Check belt tension, coolant pump, and fuel feed pump (workshop job)
197 Check belt tension, compressor (workshop job)
10 189 Check transmission oil level
9 191 Lubricate propeller shafts and support bearing 4)
1) During difficult operating conditions these should be lubricated daily.

2) For conditions which have to be met, if the interval is to apply, see page 173.
3) In aggressive/corrosive environment lubrication should be carried out every 50 hours.
4) In aggressive/corrosive environment lubrication of the universal joints should be carried out every 50 hours.
Splined joints should only be lubricated when necessary.
5) If the machine is used for handling sharp rocks, a check should be carried out daily.
Checks, oil changes and lubrication

Intervals:
Daily, 1000, 2000, 4000, and 6000 hours. (For symbol key, see page 209)
26 19 23 16
20
6000h
4000h
2000h
1000h
16
27
18
31
18
21
21
15
22
25
24
17
32
1000h
30 2000h
F R
4000h 32
6000h 1030487
29 28 33 29 30
Ite Page Measure

m
EVERY 1000 HOURS
After carrying out Daily, 50, 250, and 500 hour services
17 201 Drain sludge and condensation water from the hydraulic system
21 179 Replace air cleaner primary filter
16 195 Replace cab ventilation filter (prefilter) 1)
28 203 Lubricate lower bearing on frame joint
15 203 Lubricate cab door hinges 4)
32 193 Checking service brakes
33 193 Checking parking brake
Workshop jobs (should be carried out by an authorised workshop)
30 193 Checking brake disc wear
EVERY 2000 HOURS
After carrying out Daily, 50, 250, 500, and 1000 hour services
29 191 Change oil in front and rear axles
25 189 Change transmission oil and clean suction strainer
23 190 Replace transmission breather filter
24 190 Replace transmission oil filter
20 201 Replace hydraulic system return oil filter
19 201 Replace hydraulic system breather filter
16 195 Replace cab ventilation filter (main filter) 1)
21 179 Replace air cleaner secondary filter
18 192 Replace front and rear axle breather filters
22 178 Replace the fuel system breather filter
31 Checking freezing point of the coolant
186 Replace alternator air filter (optional equipment)
Workshop jobs (should be carried out by an authorised workshop)
Check valve clearance, engine
EVERY 4000 HOURS

After carrying out Daily, 50, 250, 500, 1000 and 2000 hour services
26 200 Change hydraulic system oil 2)
EVERY 6000 HOURS

After carrying out Daily, 50, 250, 500, 1000, 2000 and 4000 hour services
27 182 Change coolant 3)
1) Replace the cab filter more often when required

2) If the system is filled with mineral hydraulic oil or Volvo Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46, the oil should be
changed every 4000 hours (In case of other biologically degradable hydraulic oil, the oil should be changed every
2000 hours).
3) Change coolant every 6000 hours or at least every fourth year.
4) Lubricate more often when required.
Machines with automatic greasing, see page 204.
214
Specifications
Recommended lubricants 215
Specifications
For questions about oils, lubricants and extreme outdoor temperatures, contact your dealer for information.
Oil grade Recommended viscosity at varying ambient temperatures

ENGINE Volvo Ultra Diesel
Engine Oil or
Volvo Super Diesel
Engine Oil or
VDS-3 or
VDS-2 + ACEA-E7 or
VDS-2 + API CI-4 or
VDS-2 or
VDS + ACEA-E3 or
ACEA: E7, E4 or
API: CI-4, CH-4, CG-4
For recommended change inter-

vals according to the oil's grade
and sulphur content in the fuel,
see page 216.
AXLES Volvo Super Wet Brake

Transaxle Oil
HUB REDUCTION Volvo WB 102 1)
GEARS
WB102
1053112
TRANSMISSION Volvo Automatic Transmission

Fluid AT102 2)
or
Volvo Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Volvo Transmission Oil 97341 Volvo Automatic Transmission Fluid AT102 / Volvo Automatic Transmission Fluid
1053113
HYDRAULIC SYS- Volvo Super Hydraulic Oil

TEM
Swedish norm SS 15 54 34
V46/AV 46
V68/AV 68
ISO VG 46 HV
Available as an alternative ISO VG 68 HV
there is also
Volvo Biodegradable Hydraulic
Oil 46.
For further information contact 1015382
your local Volvo Service.
Cooling system Volvo Coolant VCS
See page 181.
1) 97304
2) 97342
Specifications
216 Recommended lubricants
Engine oil
Follow recommended change intervals according to the oil's grade and sulphur content in the fuel.
Sulphur content of the fuel

Oil grade < 0.3 % 0.30.5 % > 0.5 %
Oil change interval
Volvo Ultra Diesel Engine Oil
Volvo Super Diesel Engine Oil
VDS-3 500 hours 250 hours 125 hours
VDS-2 plus ACEA-E7
VDS-2 plus API CI-4
VDS-2 250 hours 125 hours 75 hours
VDS plus ACEA-E3
ACEA: E7, E4 125 hours 75 hours 50 hours
API: CI-4, CH-4, CG-4
Coolant
Only use Volvo Coolant VCS when topping up or changing coolant. To avoid damage to engine and cooling sys-
tem, different coolants or corrosion protection must not be mixed.
When using concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS and clean water, the mixture should contain 4060 % concentrated
coolant and 6040 % clean water. The amount of concentrated coolant must never be less than 40 % of the total
mixture, see table below.
Freeze protection down to Mixed-in amount of concentrated

coolant
25 °C (13 °F) 40 %
35 °C (31 °F) 50 %
46 °C (51 °F) 60 %
The concentrated coolant must not be mixed with water that contains a high degree of lime (hard water), salt or
metals.
Clean water for the cooling system must also meet the following requirements:
Description Value
Total number of solid particles < 340 ppm
Total hardness < 9.5 ° dH
Chloride < 40 ppm
Sulphate < 100 ppm
pH value 5.59
Silica < 20 mg SiO2/litre
Iron < 0.10 mg Fe/litre
Manganese < 0.05 mg Mn/litre
Electrical conductivity < 500 μS/cm
Organic content, COD-Mn < 15 mg/litre
When there is doubt as to the quality of the water, ready-mixed Volvo Coolant VCS, which contains 40 % concen-
trated coolant, must be used. Do not mix with other ready-mixed coolants, as this may cause engine damage.
Specifications
Recommended lubricants 217
Fuel
Quality requirements: The fuel should at least meet the legal requirements, and national and international stand-
ards for marketed fuels, for example: EN590 (with nationally adapted temperature requirements), ASTM D 975
No. 1D and 2D, JIS KK 2204.
Sulphur content: According to current legal requirements (the sulphur content must however not exceed 0.3 per-
cent by weight), see also page 173.
Bio-diesel fuel
Vegetable oils and / or esters, also called bio-diesel, (e.g. rape-seed methyl ester RME fuel), which are offered
on certain markets both as pure products and as mixed into the diesel fuel.
Volvo CE accepts a maximum intermix of 7% bio-diesel fuel in the diesel fuel, ready mixed from the oil companies.
A higher intermix than 7% of bio-diesel fuel may cause:
Increased emission by nitrogen oxide, (thereby not meeting legal requirements)
The short service life of motor and injection system
Increased fuel consumption
Altered engine output
Shortening the engine oil change interval to a half
Shortened service life of rubber materials in the fuel system
Less good cold handling properties of the fuel
Limit storage time for the fuel, which may cause clogging up of the fuel system if the machine is laid up for a
longer period
Warranty condition
The warranty does not cover damage caused be an intermix of more than 7% of bio-diesel fuel.
Lubrication grease
Volvo Super Grease Lithium EP2.
Or corresponding grease on lithium base with EP additives and consistency NLGI class 2.
If the machine is provided with automatic greasing system, other recommended lubricants apply.
Rear axle bearings

Front rear axle bearing:
Axle oil according to Recommended Lubricants, see page 215.
Rear rear axle bearing:*
Rubens HT2 (Q8)
Chevron Ultra Duty No. 2
Texaco Starplex HD2
Almagard 3752
*Rear rear axle bearing is maintenance-free,
and only greased in connection with a service.
Specifications
218 Change volumes
Change volumes
Capacities When changing Total
Engine oil, incl. filter 21 litres (5.5 US gal)
Transmission incl. filter 38 litres (10.0 US gal)
Front axle incl. hub reduction gear 36 litres (9.5 US gal)
Rear axle incl. hub reduction gear 41 litres (10.8 US gal)
Hydraulic system 215 litres (56.8 US gal)
Hydraulic oil tank 133 litres (35.1 US gal)
Fuel tank (available) 269 litres (71.0 US gal)
Cooling system 38 litres (10.0 US gal) 40 litres (10.6 US gal)
Oil-bath air cleaner (optional equipment) 9.1 litres (2.4 US gal)

Specifications
Interval between changes 219
Interval between changes

Oil and fluid changes Hours
Engine 500*
Coolant 6000**
Transmission, at the same time clean suction strainer 2000
Front and rear axles 2000***/4000****
Hydraulic system (working hydraulics, brake system and 2000/4000*****

steering system)
*) Regarding conditions required if the interval between engine oil changes is to apply, see page 128.
**) Change coolant every 6000 hours or at least every fourth year.
***) First change should take place after 1000 hours.
****) If separate axle oil cooling (optional equipment) is installed, the interval is 4000 hours. First change should take place
after 1000 hours.
*****) If the system is filled with mineral hydraulic oil or Volvo Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46, the interval is 4000 hours
If another biologically degradable hydraulic oil is used, the interval is 2000 hours.
Filter changes Hours
Engine, oil filters 500*
Engine, air cleaner (primary filter) 1000
Engine, air cleaner (secondary filter) 2000
Engine, coolant filter 1000
Fuel prefilter 250
Fuel filters, prefilter / water trap 500**
Fuel system, breather filter 2000
Oil-bath precleaner, cleaning filter insert (optional equip- 2000

ment)
Transmission, oil filter 2000
Transmission, breather filter 2000
Axle oil cooling filter (optional equipment) 4000
Drive axles, breather filter 2000
Cab, ventilation filters 2000***
Hydraulic system, return oil filter 2000
Hydraulic system, breather filter 2000
*) Regarding conditions required if the interval between engine oil changes is to apply, see page 173.
**) Or when replacing the engine oil filter, which may mean a shorter interval.
***) In case of environment containing asbestos the filter should be replaced every 1000 hours.
Specifications
220 Engine
Engine
L110F
Designation Volvo D7E LBE3
Max. output according to ISO 9249, SAE J1349 169 kW (230 hp) at 1700 rpm (28.3 r/s)
Max. torque according to ISO 9249, SAE J1349 1059 Nm (781 lbf ft) at 1500 rpm (25.0 r/s)
Number of cylinders 6
Cylinder bore 108 mm (4.252 in)
Stroke 130 mm (5.118 in)
Cylinder capacity 7.1 litres (433 in3)
Compression ratio 18.1:1
Valve clearance Method with angular tightening is required
Idling speed, low 13 ± 0.8 r/s (780 ± 50rpm)
Idling speed, high 37.5 ± 0.6 r/s (2250 ± 35rpm)
Air cleaner Air cleaning in 3 steps
Precleaner main filter secondary filter
Lubrication system
Oil pressure when operating 400500 kPa (45 bar) (3280 psi)
Oil pressure, low idling min. 60 kPa (0.6 bar) (87 psi)
Fuel system
Common rail
Feed pressure 600 kPa (6.0 bar) (87 psi)
Cold-starting device Preheating element in inlet manifold
Intercooler Air/air
Cooling system
Type Closed system
Thermostat begins to open at 83 °C (181 °F)
Thermostat fully open at 95 °C (203 °F)

Specifications
Engine 221
L120F
Designation Volvo D7E LAE3
Max. output according to ISO 9249, SAE J1349 179 kW (243 hp) at 1700 rpm (28.3 r/s)
Max. torque according to ISO 9249, SAE J1349 1059 Nm (781 lbf ft) at 1500 rpm (25.0 r/s)
Number of cylinders 6
Cylinder bore 108 mm (4.252 in)
Stroke 130 mm (5.118 in)
Cylinder capacity 7.1 litres (433 in3)
Compression ratio 18.1:1
Valve clearance Method with angular tightening is required
Idling speed, low 13 ± 0.8 r/s (780 ± 50rpm)
Idling speed, high 37.5 ± 0.6 r/s (2250 ± 35rpm)
Air cleaner Air cleaning in 3 steps
Precleaner main filter secondary filter
Lubrication system
Oil pressure when operating 400500 kPa (45 bar) (3280 psi)
Oil pressure, low idling min. 60 kPa (0.6 bar)
Fuel system
Common rail
Feed pressure 600 kPa (6.0 bar) (87 psi)
Cold-starting device Preheating element in inlet manifold
Intercooler Air/air
Cooling system
Type Closed system
Thermostat begins to open at 83 °C (181 °F)
Thermostat fully open at 95 °C (203 °F)

Specifications
Electrical system
System voltage 24 V
Batteries 2 (connected in series)
Battery voltage 12 V
Battery capacity 2 x 140 Ah
Alternator 2280 W / 80 A
Starter motor output 5.5 kW (7.5 hp)
Battery electrolyte density kg/dm3
Fully charged battery 1.2751.285
The battery should be recharged at a density of 1.250
Bulbs Watt Socket

Travel lights, low beams 70 PX 26D (H7)
Travel lights, high beams 70 PK 22s (H3)
Parking lights, front 4 BA 9s
Parking lights, rear 10 BA 15s
Tail lights 10 BA 15s
Stop lights 21 BA 15s
Direction indicators, front 21 BA 15s
Direction indicators, rear 21 BA 15s
Cab light 10, 21 BA 15s
Working lights, front halogen (optional) 70 PK 22s (H3)
Working lights, rear halogen (optional) 70 PK 22s (H3)
Guide light in switches LED

Specifications
Relays
RE9110 RE3601 RE2301 RE8701 RE3102
R09
DI21
DI10
DI08
DI06 DI17
R02
DI22 DI20
DA DI07 DB DC DD
DI23 DI09
DI18 DI19
R01 FU 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
FUSE TEST
R15
DI14
RF1
RE03
RE01 RE02 RE05
DI13
DI12
RE04
DI15
RE06 RE07 RE08 RE09 RE10 RE11 RE12
DI05
C01
30K
DI01
DI03
DI11
RE13 RE16 RE17
RE14 RE15 RE18
FU 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
R14
R10
R03
R07
P1
DI16
R13
R06
R05
R04
DI04
DI02
DE DF DG DH
R08
1027076
RE FUNCTION RE FUNCTION
01 Bucket positioner 13 Voltage supply E-ECU, V-ECU, V2-ECU
02 Reversing alarm 14 Voltage supply ECC
03 Working lights, front 15 Windscreen wiper
04 Working lights, rear 16 15A feed
05 Boom kick-out 17 15A feed
06 Starter relay 18 15EA feed
07 Working lights cab front
08 Boom Suspension System BSS
09 Rear window wiper 8701 Water pump interval heating
10 Stop lights 9101 Adjustable flow for 3rd hydraulic function
11 Working lights radiator casing RF 1 Flasher relay
12 30 feed controlled by I-ECU
Holding voltage RE 13
Specifications
1027077
RE2501, RE6401
Relays positioned outside the electrical distribution box
RE FUNCTION RE FUNCTION
2501 Preheating 6401 Secondary steering
Specifications
Fuses
Fuses
FU A FUNCTION FU A FUNCTION
01 5 Stop lights 31 5 Preheating relay, RE2501
02 32 10 boom Suspension System, attachment lock,
detent function 3rd hydraulic function
03 15 Working lights cab, front 33 10 Working hydraulics
04 5 Voltage supply to RE14 34 10 Windscreen wiper, windscreen washer, head-
light flasher
05 5 Instrument lighting, parking light front left, side 35 10 Rear window wiper, rear window washer, level
light front left, tail light right monitor washer fluid
06 5 Parking light front right, side light front right, 36 5 Battery charging
tail light left, number plate lighting
07 5 Low beam, left 37 5 Hazard flashers
08 5 Low beam, right 38 5 Electrically heated fuel filter, working lights,
double working lights cab, working lights auto-
matic reversing light
09 5 Reversing warning unit 39 10 Horn, kick-down, rear vision camera, electri-
cally heated rear view mirrors, electrically
adjustable rear view mirrors
10 5 High beam, right 41 10 Seat with air suspension, heated seat, position
sensor operator seat
11 5 High beam, left 42 5 Mode selector, differential lock, fully automatic
downshifting, gear selector control on control
lever carrier, comfort drive control, Boom Sus-
pension System activation / function selection
12 5 15RA feed to voltage converter 43 10 Automatic greasing
13 15 Working lights forward, attachments 45 5 Gear selector control, steering column
14 5 Direction indicator 48 5 Parking Brake
15 15 Working lights rear, working lights automatic 49 5 Secondary steering
reversing light
16 15 Working lights radiator casing 50 5 Voltage supply VCADS Pro service socket
17 10 Voltage supply I-ECU, holding voltage RE13 51 5 Ignition switch dependent voltage supply, I-
ECU, V-ECU, V2-ECU, ECC
18 10 Power socket 24 V 61 15 Electrically heated fuel filter
19 15 Travel lights 62 5 Rear vision camera
20 10 Ignition switch voltage supply 63 5 Rear vision camera, activated when reversing
21 10 Rotating warning beacon, interior lighting 64
22 5 Voltage supply to RE12 65
23 5 Starter motor 66 15 Radio
24 15 Voltage supply E-ECU
25 15 Voltage supply V-ECU 70 125 Main fuse
26 15 Voltage supply V2-ECU 71 125 Secondary steering pump
27 20 Cab fan 72 125 Preheating
28 10 AC compressor, water pump interval heating 74 10 Voltage converter
29 5 ECC, air conditioning
30 5 EGR valve
Specifications
FU61
R09
DI21
DI10
DI08
DI06 DI17
R02
DI22 DI20
DA DI07 DB DC DD
DI23 DI09
DI18 DI19
R01 FU 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
FUSE TEST
R15
DI14
RF1
RE03
RE01 RE02 RE05
DI13
DI12
RE04
DI15
RE06 RE07 RE08 RE09 RE10 RE11 RE12
DI05
C01
30K
DI01
DI11
DI03
RE13 RE16 RE17

RE14 RE15 RE18
FU 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
R14
R10
R03
R07
P1
DI16
R13
R06
R05
R04
DI04
DI02
DE DF DG DH
R08
1027078
FU74
FU72
FU71
1027079 FU70
Specifications
Transmission 227
Transmission
L110F
Transmission
Type Full power shift transmission
Make Volvo
Designation HTE204
Torque converter Single stage
Torque multiplication 2.69:1
Number of gears 4 forward, 4 reverse
Gear-shifting system Electro-hydraulic with APS (Automatic Power Shift)
Speed range 1st gear 07.0 km/h (04.3 mph)

(tyres 20.5R25L2)
2nd gear 013.0 km/h (08.1 mph)
3rd gear 024.4 km/h (015.2 mph)
4th gear 037.0 km/h (023.0 mph)
L120F
Transmission
Type Full power shift transmission
Make Volvo
Designation HTE205
Torque converter Single stage
Torque multiplication 2.85 : 1
Number of gears 4 forward, 4 reverse
Gear-shifting system Electro-hydraulic with APS (Automatic Power Shift)
Speed range 1st gear 07.0 km/h (04.3 mph)

(tyres 20.5R25L2)
2nd gear 013.0 km/h (08.1 mph)
3rd gear 024.4 km/h (015.2 mph)
4th gear 037.0 km/h (023.0 mph)

Specifications
228 Axles
Axles
L110F
Type Fully floating drive shafts with hub reductions of the planetary
gear type
Front axle, make Volvo
Designation AWB31
Rear axle, make Volvo
Designation AWB30
Differential lock On front axle
Type Dog clutch 100%
Operation, differential lock Hydraulic via servo pressure
L120F
Type Fully floating drive shafts with hub reductions of the planetary
gear type
Front axle, make Volvo
Designation AWB31
Rear axle, make Volvo
Designation AWB30
Differential lock On front axle
Type Dog clutch 100%
Operation, differential lock Hydraulic via servo pressure

Specifications
Brake system 229
Brake system
L110F
Brakes
Service brakes, type Dual circuit, all-hydraulic, wet disc brake
Number of discs per wheel 1
Accumulator capacity 1 litre (61 in3), 3 pcs.
Parking brake
Type Electrically operated hydraulic disc brake
Control pressure 1216 MPa (120160 bar) (17402321 psi)
L120F
Brakes
Service brakes, type Dual circuit, all-hydraulic, wet disc brake
Number of discs per wheel 1
Accumulator capacity 1 litre (61 in3), 3 pcs.
Parking brake
Type Electrically operated hydraulic disc brake
Control pressure 1216 MPa (120160 bar) (17402321 psi)

Specifications
230 Steering system
Steering system
Type Load-sensing, hydrostatic
Number of steering wheel revolutions, total 4.0 revolutions
Steering arc ±40°
Steering pump in common with the working hydraulics
Oil pump
Type Axial piston pump, variable displacement
Working pressure, high idling speed 21.0 ± 0.3 MPa (210 ± 3 bar)
Shock valve opening pressure at 10 litres 2729 MPa (270290 bar) (39164206 psi)
(2.6 US gal) per minute
Specifications
Tyre sizes and air pressures 231
Tyre sizes and air pressures

L110F
If other tyres are used for than those stated, the tyre manufacturer should be contacted regarding information
about the correct tyre pressure. All tyres in the tables below are not available on all markets. Contact your dealer
for further information.
Material handling Material handling
Timber handling
Tyres loading work 10 km/ Loading/Carrying 25
25 km/h (15.5 mph)
h (6.2 mph) km/h (15.5 mph)
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
Goodyear kPa 375 225 375 225 425 275
23.5R25 GP-2B psi 54 33 54 33 62 40
Goodyear kPa 375 225 375 225 425 275
23.5R25 GP-4B psi 54 33 54 33 62 40
Goodyear kPa 375 225 375 225 425 275
23.5R25 RL-2+ psi 54 33 54 33 62 40
Goodyear kPa 375 225 375 225 425 275
23.5R25 TL-3A+ psi 54 33 54 33 62 40
Goodyear kPa 375 225 375 225 Not rec- Not recom-
23.5R25 RL-5K psi 54 33 54 33 ommende mended
d
Goodyear kPa 325 200 325 200 Not Not recom-
23.5R25 HRL psi 47 29 47 29 recommended
mended
Goodyear kPa 350 250 350 250 400 300
750/65R25 GP-3D psi 51 36 51 36 58 44
Michelin kPa 275 200 275 200 325 250
23.5R25 XHA psi 40 29 40 29 47 36
Michelin kPa 275 200 275 200 Not Not recom-
23.5R25 XMINE D2 psi 40 29 40 29 recommended
mended
Bridgestone kPa 400 250 400 250 450 350
23.5R25 VJT psi 58 36 58 36 65 51
Bridgestone kPa 400 250 400 250 Not Not recom-
23.5R25 VSDL psi 58 36 58 36 recommended
mended
Michelin kPa 250 200 250 200 300 250
750/65R25 XLD psi 36 29 36 29 44 36
The recommended tyre pressures are based on the rated load for each handling case.
In case of heavier loads, especially during timber handling or loading-carrying operations, a higher tyre pres-
sure is required. Contact the tyre manufacturer for information about which air pressure is the correct one for
the load to be handled and transported over a particular distance.
If L4 or L5 tyres are used for loading-carrying operations, due attention must be paid to the transporting dis-
tances.
Radial tyres are to be preferred for loading-carrying operations, as the build-up of heat is less in this type of
tyre.
Specifications
232 Tyre sizes and air pressures
L120F
If other tyres are used for than those stated, the tyre manufacturer should be contacted regarding information
about the correct tyre pressure. All tyres in the tables below are not available on all markets. Contact your dealer
for further information.
Material handling Material handling
Timber handling
Tyres loading work 10 km/ Loading/Carrying 25
25 km/h (15.5 mph)
h (6.2 mph) km/h (15.5 mph)
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
Goodyear kPa 400 250 400 250 425 300
23.5R25 GP-2B psi 58 36 58 36 62 44
Goodyear kPa 400 250 400 250 425 300
23.5R25 GP-4B psi 58 36 58 36 62 44
Goodyear kPa 400 250 400 250 425 300
23.5R25 RL-2+ psi 58 36 58 36 62 44
Goodyear kPa 400 250 400 250 425 300
23.5R25 TL-3A+ psi 58 36 58 36 62 44
23.5R25 RL-5K psi 58 36 58 36 recommended
mended
23.5R25 HRL psi 51 29 51 29 recommended
mended
Goodyear kPa 400 300 400 300 425 300
750/65R25 GP-3D psi 58 44 58 44 62 44
Michelin kPa 325 200 325 200 375 250
23.5R25 XHA psi 47 29 47 29 54 36
Michelin kPa 325 200 325 200 Not Not recom-
23.5R25 XMINE D2 psi 47 29 47 29 recommended
mended
Bridgestone kPa 400 250 400 250 450 350
23.5R25 VJT psi 58 36 58 36 65 51
Bridgestone kPa 400 250 400 250 Not Not recom-
23.5R25 VSDL psi 58 36 58 36 recommended
mended
Michelin kPa 350 250 350 250 400 300
750/65R25 XLD psi 51 36 51 36 58 44
The recommended tyre pressures are based on the rated load for each handling case.
In case of heavier loads, especially during timber handling or loading-carrying operations, a higher tyre pres-
sure is required. Contact the tyre manufacturer for information about which air pressure is the correct one for
the load to be handled and transported over a particular distance.
If L4 or L5 tyres are used for loading-carrying operations, due attention must be paid to the transporting dis-
tances.
Radial tyres are to be preferred for loading-carrying operations, as the build-up of heat is less in this type of
tyre.
Specifications
Wheel nuts, tightening torques 233
Wheel nuts, tightening torques

Wheel bolts
Tightening torque 600 ±50 Nm (443 ±37 lbf ft)

Specifications
234 Cab
Cab
General
The cab is fitted on rubber elements, is insulated and has a flat floor with rubber mat.
Tested and approved as a protective cab and meets standards according to ISO/DIS 3471-1:2004 and SAE
1040-MAY 94 (ROPS), ISO/DIS 3449-2004 (FOPS) and ISO 6055-1997 (protective roof for high-lifting rider
trucks).
Cab interior fittings and upholstery Fire retardant (fire resistant) measured according to ISO 3795-
1989
Number of emergency exits 2 (the door and the right side window)
Heating and ventilation

The basic version of the loader is provided with a heating and ventilation system with defrosting for all win-
dows and the best possible air distribution (10 outlets). Air conditioning is available as optional extra.
Operator seat
This machine is equipped with an operator seat, which meets the criteria of EN ISO 7096.
Height adjustment (rapid adjustment) 100 mm (4 in)
Longitudinal adjustment 160 mm (6.3 in)
Adjustment for driver weight 40130 kg (88287 lb)/ 40160 kg (88353 lb) (HD-seat
Adjustment of back-rest, (adjustable back- 12°

rest inclination)
Upholstery Fire resistant
Lap type seat belt with reel Yes

Specifications
Cab 235
Hand-arm vibrations
Emission of hand-arm vibration during real operating conditions at its intended use is less than 2.5 m/s2 RMS (root
mean square) acceleration according to ISO 8041.
Whole-body vibrations
Emission of Whole-Body Vibration during real operating conditions at its intended use is according to the table
below.
Typical operating conditions Vibration emission value Vibration emission value Vibration emission value
aw,eqx aw,eqy aw,eqz
(m/s² RMS) (m/s² RMS) (m/s² RMS)
Loading and carrying work 0.6 0.6 0.5
Mining application 0.8 0.7 0.8
Transporting operation 0.5 0.7 0.5
V-shaped loading and car- 0.7 0.6 0.5

rying work
The following vibration directions are defined:

x = longitudinally
y = lateral
z = vertical
NOTE! These whole-body vibration emission values were determined at particular operating and terrain
conditions and is therefore not representative for all the various conditions in accordance with the intend-
ed use of the machine and should not alone be used to determine the whole-body vibration exposure to
the operator using the machine. For this purpose, the information in ISO/TR 25398 is recommended.
To ensure that the whole-body vibration emission during machine use is kept to a minimum, see page 126.
Sound information, L110F

Sound pressure level (LpA) at operator position 68 dB (A)
(Measurement according to ISO 6396)
Sound power level (LWA) around the machine 106 dB (A)
(Measurement according to 2000/14/EC with
applicable appendices and measuring method
according to ISO 6395)
Sound information, L120F

Sound pressure level (LpA) at operator position 68 dB (A)
(Measurement according to ISO 6396)
Sound power level (LWA) around the machine 106 dB (A)
(Measurement according to 2000/14/EC with
applicable appendices and measuring method
according to ISO 6395)
NOTE! Uncertainties in given noise values (e.g. uncertainty in production and measuring instruments) are
calculated in accordance with ISO 6395:2008 for the sound power level around the machine and ISO
6396:2008 for the sound pressure level at operator position.
Specifications
Hydraulic system
L110F
Type Load-sensing, (closed centre)
Hydraulic oil pump, type Axial piston pump, variable displacement
Pump 1
Function Working hydraulics
Displacement 80 cm3 (4.9 in3)
Flow at 32 r/s (1900 rpm) and 10 MPa (100 145 litres (38.3 US gal) per minute
bar) pressure
Pump 2
Function Working hydraulics, steering system, brake system and servo

system
bar) (1450 psi) pressure
Pump 3
Function Cooling fan pump, brake system, pilot valve
Working pressure, high idling speed 21 ± 0.5 MPa (210 ± 5 bar)

Specifications
Hydraulic system 237
L120F
Type Load-sensing, (closed centre)
Hydraulic oil pump, type Axial piston pump, variable displacement
Pump 1
Function Working hydraulics
Pump 2
Function Working hydraulics, steering system, brake system and servo

system
Pump 3
Function Cooling fan pump, brake system, pilot valve
Working pressure, high idling speed 21 ± 0.5 MPa (210 ± 5 bar)

Specifications
238 Dimensions
Dimensions
L110F
Specifications and dimensions comply in applicable parts with ISO 7131:1997, SAE J732 JUN92, ISO 7546 1983,
SAE J742 FEB85, SAE J818 MAY87, ISO 14397:2002 Part 1 & 2.
The data apply to a machine with 23.5 R25* L3 tyres and 3.1 m3 (4.1 yd3) bucket (direct-mounted).
L64136A
L64050A
Standard boom (lifting arms) Standard boom (lifting arms) Extended boom
A * P*** 50° B 7000 mm (22' 11.6'')
B 6470 mm (21' 2.7'') R 41° J 4220 mm (13' 10.1'')
C 3200 mm (10' 6.0'') R1** 46° K 4530 mm (14' 10.3'')
D 440 mm (1' 5.3'') S 66° R 42°
E * T 96 mm (0' 3.8'') S 64°
F 3360 mm (3' 0.3'') U 470 mm (1' 6.5'') T 105 mm (0' 4.1'')
G 2132 mm (6' 11.9'') V * Z 3800 mm (12' 5.6'')
H * X 2070 mm (6' 9.5'')
J 3700 mm (12' 1.7'') Y 2670 mm (8' 9.1'')
K 4020 mm (13' 2.3'') Z 3290 mm (10' 9.5'')
L * a2 5730 mm (18' 9.6'')
M * a3 3060 mm (10' 0.5'')
N * a4 ±40°
O 55°
*) See table on the next page

**) Carrying position SAE
***) P-max. 50°
The difference between standard boom and long boom is shown here with the same size bucket.
Note that the version with long boom is intended to be used with a material with a lower density.
Specifications
Dimensions 239
L120F
Specifications and dimensions comply in applicable parts with ISO 7131:1997, SAE J732 JUN92,
ISO 7546: 1983, SAE J742 FEB85, SAE J818 MAY87, ISO 14397:2002 Part 1 & 2.
The data apply to a machine with 23.5 R25* L3 tyres and 3.1 m3 (4.1 yd3) bucket (direct-mounted).
L64136A
L64050A
Standard boom (lifting arms) Standard boom (lifting arms) Extended boom
A * P*** 49° B 7060 mm (23' 2.0'')
B 6580 mm (21' 7.1'') R 42° J 4290 mm (14' 0.9'')
C 3200 mm (10' 6.0'') R1** 47° K 4610 mm (15' 1.5'')
D 420 mm (1' 4.5'') S 67° R 43°
E * T 96 mm (0' 3.8'') S 64°
F 3370 mm (11' 0.7'') U 510 mm (1 ft 8.1 in) T 145 mm (0' 5.7'')
G 2133 mm (7' 0.0'') V * Z 3700 mm (12' 1.7'')
H * X 2070 mm (6' 9.5'')
J 3780 mm (12' 4.8'') Y 2670 mm (8' 9.1'')
K 4090 mm (13' 5.0'') Z 3330 mm (10' 11.1'')
L * a2 5730 mm (18' 9.6'')
M * a3 3060 mm (10' 0.5'')
N * a4 ±40°
O 54°
*) See table on the next page

**) Carrying position SAE
***) P-max. 49°
The difference between standard boom and long boom is shown here with the same size bucket.
Note that the version with long boom is intended to be used with a material with a lower density.
Specifications
240 Machine, volumes
Machine, volumes
L110F
The maximum weight of the machine (incl. equipment and attachment) is 23000 kg (50706 lb).
Current machine weight depends on the equipment, see table (last line).
Tyres 23.5 R25 Standard buckets Rock & Light material Long boom
L3 gravel han-
dling*
Teeth Teeth Edge Edge sav- Edge sav- Edge sav- Teeth & wear Edge savers
savers ers ers ers segments
Capacity, 2.8 m3 (3.7 3.0 m3 (3.9 3.1 m3 3.1 m3 (4.1 3.4 m3 (4.4 3.4 m3 (4.4 2.7 m3 (3.5 5.5 m3 (7.2 9.5 m3 (12.4
heaped ISO/ yd3) yd3) (4.1 yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3)
SAE
Capacity filled 3.1 m3 (4.1 3.3 m3 (4.3 3.4 m3 3.4 m3 (4.4 3.7 m3 (4.8 3.7 m3 (4.8 3.0 m3 (3.9 6.1 m3 (8.0 10.5 m3
to 110 % yd3) yd3) (4.4 yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) (13.7 yd3)
Static tipping 13440 kg 12650 kg 13120 kg 12410 kg 12260 kg 13040 kg 13330 kg 11560 kg 11650 kg 2550 kg (
load, straight (29639 lb) (27888 lb) (28925 lb) (27359 lb) (27929 lb) (28748 lb) (29388 lb) (25485 lb) (25684 lb) 5622 lb)
machine
load, turned (26455 lb) (24824 lb) (25772 lb) (24295 lb) (23986 lb) (25573 lb) (26125 lb) (22487 lb) (22597 lb) 5115 lb)
35°
load, fully (25507 lb) (23898 lb) (24846 lb) (23369 lb) (23082 lb) (24626 lb) (25155 lb) (21583 lb) (21693 lb) 4960 lb)
turned
machine ***)
Break-out force 166.7 kN 146.8 kN 156.7 kN 139.3 kN 132.8 kN 153.5 kN 129.9 kN 105.0 kN 91.6 kN +17 kN
(37476 lbf) (33002 lbf) (35228 lbf) (31316 lbf) (29855 lbf) (34508 lbf) (29203 lbf) (23605 lbf) (20593 lbf) (+3822 lbf)
A 8070 mm 8240 mm 7890 mm 8060 mm 8130 mm 7920 mm 8310 mm (27' 8530 mm 8820 mm +500 mm
(26' 5.7'') (27' 0.4'') (25' 10.6'') (26' 5.3'') (26' 8.1'') (25' 11.8'') 3.2'') (27' 11.8'') (28' 11.2'') (+1' 7.7'')
E 1320 mm 1470 mm 1160 mm 1310 mm 1380 mm 1190 mm 1510 mm (4' 1730 mm (5' 1990 mm (6' +/-0 mm
(4' 4.0'') (4' 9.9'') (3' 9.7'') (4' 3.6'') (4' 6.3'') (3' 10.9'') 11.4'') 8.1'') 6.3'')
H**) 2740 mm 2630 mm 2860 mm 2750 mm 2700 mm 2840 mm 2610 mm (8' 2390 mm (7' 2190 mm (7' +520 mm (1'
(8' 11.9'') (8' 7.5'') (9' 3.6'') (9' 0.3'') (8' 10.3'') (9' 3.8'') 6.8'') 10.1'') 2.2'') 8.5'')
L 5490 mm 5600 mm 5480 mm 5600 mm 5660 mm 5610 mm 5550 mm (18' 5820 mm 5980 mm +510 mm
(18' 0.1'') (18' 4.5'') (17' 11.7'') (18' 4.5'') (18' 6.8'') (18' 4.9'') 2.5'') (19' 1.1'') (19' 7.4'') (+1' 8.1'')
M**) 1230 mm 1350 mm 1110 mm 1230 mm 1280 mm 1130 mm 1400 mm (4' 1520 mm (4' 1730 mm (5' 30 mm (0'
(4' 0.4'') (4' 5.1'') (3' 7.7'') (4' 0.4'') (4' 2.4'') (3' 8.5'') 7.1'') 11.8'') 8.1'') 1.2'')
N**) 1730 mm 1780 mm 1680 mm 1740 mm 1760 mm 1690 mm 1810 mm (5' 1780 mm (5' 1790 mm (5' +430 mm
(5' 8.1'') (5' 10.1'') (5' 6.1'') (5' 8.5'') (5' 9.3'') (5' 6.5'') 11.3'') 10.1'') 10.5'') (+1' 4.9'')
V 2880 mm 2880 mm 3000 mm 2880 mm 2880 mm 3000 mm 2880 mm (9' 3000 mm (9' 3400 mm -
(9' 5.4'') (9' 5.4'') (9' 10.1'') (9' 5.4'') (9' 5.4'') (9' 10.1'') 5.4'') 10.1'') (11' 1.9'')
a1 12680 mm 12770 mm 12700 mm 12670 mm 12710 mm 12720 mm 12830 mm 13060 mm 13600 mm -
(41' 7.2'') (41' 10.8'') (41' 8.0'') (41' 6.8'') (41' 8.4'') (41' 8.8'') (42' 1.1'') (42' 10.2'') (44' 7.4'')
Machine 18150 kg 18430 kg 18300 kg 18540 kg 18610 kg 18430 kg 19330 kg 18950 kg 19170 kg +310 kg
weight (40014 lb) (40631 lb) (40345 lb) (40874 lb) (41028 lb) (40631 lb) (42615 lb) (41778 lb) (42263 lb) (+683 lb)
*) With L5 tyres.
**) Measurement to point of bucket tooth or edge saver. Dumping height to edge of bucket (acc. to SAE) + ap-
prox. 200 mm (8 in).
Measurement at a dumping angle of 45°. (Spade-nose bucket 42°.)
***) When the machine is used with a bucket, a working load of 50% of the tipping load for a fully steered machine
is permissible. Depending on application and/or machine size the manufacturer often recommends a utilisation
lower than 50%.
Specifications
Machine, volumes 241
L120F
The maximum weight of the machine (incl. equipment and attachment) is 24000 kg (52911 lb)
Current machine weight depends on the equipment, see table (last line).
Tyres 23.5 R25 Standard buckets Rock & Light material Long
L3 gravel han- boom
dling*
Teeth Edge sav- Teeth Edge sav- Edge sav- Edge sav- Teeth & wear Edge savers
ers ers ers ers segments
Capacity, 3.0 m3 (3.9 3.1 m3 (4.1 3.3 m3 3.4 m3 (4.4 3.4 m3 (4.4 3.6 m3 (4.7 3.0 m3 (3.9 5.5 m3 (7.2 9.5 m3 (12.4
heaped ISO/ yd3) yd3) (4.3 yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3)
SAE
Capacity filled 3.3 m3 (4.3 3.4 m3 (4.4 3.6 m3 3.7 m3 (4.8 3.7 m3 (4.8 4.0 m3 (5.2 3.3 m3 (4.3 6.1 m3 (8.0 10.5 m3 (8.4
to 110 % yd3) yd3) (4.7 yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3) yd3)
Static tipping 14540 kg 13580 kg 13590 kg 14240 kg 13910 kg 13340 kg 14500 kg 12700 kg 12840 kg 2630 kg
load, straight (32055 lb) (29939 lb) (29960 lb) (31394 lb) (30666 lb) (29410 lb) (31967 lb) (27999 lb) (28307 lb) (5798 lb)
machine
load, turned (28484 lb) (26477 lb) (26522 lb) (27822 lb) (27139 lb) (25970 lb) (28351 lb) (24648 lb) (24846 lb) (5269 lb)
35°
load, fully (27425 lb) (25463 lb) (25507 lb) (26764 lb) (26081 lb) (24978 lb) (27271 lb) (23656 lb) (23831 lb) (5115 lb)
turned machine
***)
Break-out force 170.1 kN 148.5 kN 148.8 kN 164.0 kN 151.0 kN 138.0 kN 138.6 kN 112.0 kN 97.8 kN +6 kN
(38240 lbf) (33384 lbf) (33451 lbf) (36869 lbf) (33946 lbf) (31024 lbf) (31159 lbf) (25179 lbf) (21986 lbf) (+1349 lbf)
A 8200 mm 8150 mm 8380 mm 8020 mm 8130 mm 8270 mm 8390 mm (27' 8610 mm 8920 mm +500 mm
(26' 10.8'') (26' 8.9'') (27' 5.9'') (26' 3.7'') (26' 8.1'') (27' 1.6'') 6.3'') (28' 3.0'') (29' 3.2'') (+1' 7.7'')
E 1370 mm 1330 mm 1530 mm 1200 mm 1300 mm 1430 mm 1520 mm (4' 1740 mm (5' 2010 mm (6' +30 mm
(4' 5.9'') (4' 4.4'') (5' 0.2'') (3' 11.2'') (4' 3.2'') (4' 8.3'') 11.8'') 8.5'') 7.1'') (+1.18 in)
H**) 2800 mm 2820 mm 2680 mm 2910 mm 2840 mm 2740 mm 2690 mm (8' 2470 mm (8' 2260 mm (7' +510 mm
(9' 2.2'') (2' 5.9'') (9' 11.3'') (9' 6.6'') (9' 3.8'') (8' 11.9'') 9.9'') 1.2'') 5.0'') (+1' 8.1'')
L 5610 mm 5670 mm 5730 mm 5690 mm 5750 mm 5780 mm 5690 mm (18' 5900 mm 6060 mm +520 mm
(18' 4.9'') (18' 7.2'') (18' 9.6'') (18' 8.0'') (18' 10.4'') (18' 11.6'') 8.0'') (19' 4.3'') (19' 10.6'') (1' 8.5'')
M**) 1330 mm 1270 mm 1460 mm 1170 mm 1250 mm 1350 mm 1440 mm (4' 1560 mm (5' 1760 mm (5' 30 mm (
(4' 4.4'') (4' 2.0'') (4' 9.5'') (3' 10.1'') (4' 5.2'') (4' 5.1'') 8.7'') 1.4'') 9.3'') 0' 1.2'')
N**) 1880 mm 1830 mm 1930 mm 1780 mm 1820 mm 1860 mm 1920 mm (6' 1880 mm (6' 1900 mm (6' +430 mm
(6' 2.0'') (6' 0.0'') (6' 4.0'') (5' 10.1'') (5' 11.7'') (6' 1.2'') 3.6'') 2.0'') 2.8'') (+1' 4.9'')
V 2880 mm 2880 mm 2880 mm 3000 mm 3000 mm 2880 mm 2880 mm (9' 3000 mm (9' 3400 mm -
(9' 5.4'') (9' 5.4'') (9' 5.4'') (9' 10.1'') (9' 10.1'') (9' 5.4'') 5.4'') 10.1'') (11' 1.9'')
a1 12780 mm 12740 mm 12880 mm 12780 mm 12830 mm 12800 mm 12890 mm 13120 mm 13660 mm -
(41' 11.1'') (41' 10.6'') (42' 3.1'') (41' 11.1'') (42' 1.1'') (41' 11.9'') (42' 3.5'') (43' 0.5'') (44' 9.8'')
Machine weight 18980 kg 19310 kg 19270 kg 19200 kg 19380 kg 19430 kg 20010 kg 19630 kg 19950 kg +190 kg
(41844 lb) (42571 lb) (42483 lb) (42329 lb) (42726 lb) (42836 lb) (44114 lb) (43277 lb) (43982 lb) (+419 lb)
*) With L5 tyres.
**) Measurement to point of bucket tooth or edge saver. Dumping height to edge of bucket (acc. to SAE) + ap-
prox. 200 mm (8 in).
*) Measurement to tip of bucket tooth or edge savers. Dumping height to edge of bucket (acc. to SAE) + approx.
200 mm (8 in).
***) When the machine is used with a bucket, a working load of 50% of the tipping load for a fully steered machine
is permissible. Depending on application and/or machine size the manufacturer often recommends a utilisation
lower than 50%.
Specifications
242 Combination table, interchangeable equipment (attachments)
machine model
Combination table, interchangeable equipment
(attachments) machine model
The table shows attachment in the category interchangeable equipment *)(attachments that can be changed
by the operator) and for which machines these attachments are approved.
Model / Historical
Machine
Attachment, type Attachment, model Type Page authoriza-
model
number tion
Bucket with clamping arm REF H TB CA 5.2 m3 3000 mm 83364 137 L110F L110E
L120F L120E
High-tipping light material HIT H BOE 7.0 m3 3000 mm **) 82041 138 L110F L110E
bucket L120F L120E
High-tipping light material HIT H BOE 4.5 m3 3000 mm, 83209 138 L110F
bucket side-mounted cylinders
High-tipping light material HIT H BOE 5.5 m3 3000 mm, 84233 138 L120F L120E
bucket side-mounted cylinders
High-tipping light material HIT H BOE 5.0 m3 3000 mm 82043 138 L110F L110E
bucket L120F L120D/E
High-tipping light material HIT H BOE 9.5 m3 3400 mm***) 82045 138 L110F L110E
bucket L120F L120D/E
High-tipping light material HIT H BOE 5.0 m3 3000 mm, 84231 138 L110F L110E
bucket side-mounted cylinders L120F
Pallet forks, sideshift version Sideshift pallet forks 1500 mm 83772 149 L110F L110E
FFPSS L120F L120E
Pallet forks, sideshift version Sideshift pallet forks 2000 mm 83773 149 L110F L110E
FFPSS L120F L120E
Pallet forks, combi forks Combi forks 1.6 m2 COF 148 L110F L110E
L120F L120E
Log grapple, unloading UNLGR H 1.8 m2 1634 mm 80834 142 L110F L110E
L120F L120D/E
Log grapple, unloading UNLGR H 2.4 m2 1634 mm 80831 142 L110F L110E
L120F L120D/E
Log grapple, sorting UNLGR H 1.8 m2 1634 mm 80835 142 L110F L110E
L120F L120D/E
Log grapple, sorting UNLGR H 2.4 m2 1634 mm 80832 142 L110F L110E
L120F L120D/E
Log grapple, general purpose UNLGR H 1.3 m2 1200 mm 82340 142 L110F L110E
L120F L120D/E
Log grapple, general purpose UNLGR H 1.3 m2 1635 mm 82339 142 L110F L110E
L120F L120D/E
High-Lift grapple SWC GR 1.5 m2 82131 145 L110F L110E
L120F L120D/E
L120F L120D/E
L120F L120D/E
Log grapple, tropical UNLGR H 1.1 m2 2500 mm 82695 142 L110F L110E
L120F L120D/E
Material handling arm MHA H HYDR 82137 150 L110F L110E
L120F L120D/E
*) "interchangeable equipment" (attachments that can be changed by operator) means that the attachment re-
quires the combination hydraulic attachment lock ("hook-on") and quick-couplings for optional hydraulics (3rd
and 4th hydraulic function).
**) Requires installation of two optional highly placed, front-mounted mirrors (optional equipment)
***) Requires camera.
Specifications
Pallet forks 243
Pallet forks
L110F
Pallet fork (for attachment bracket)
Attachment Bracket-mounted
Order No. 93688
Tyres 23.5R25
L68186A
A
C
B
A 870 mm (2' 10.3'') C 20 mm (0' 0.8'') E 3780 mm (12' 4.8'')

B 1650 mm (5' 5.0'') D 1830 mm (6' 0.0'') F 770 mm (2' 6.3'')
Loading table for pallet fork
Rated operating load capacity (rated work load) at different load cen-
tre distances
Ground Tyres 500 mm 600 mm 700 mm 800 mm 900 mm 1200 mm

(19.7 in) (23.6 in) (27.6 in) (31.5 in) (35.4 in) (47.2 in)
Rough terrain 23.5R25 5350 kg 5150 kg 5000 kg 4850 kg 4700 kg 4300 kg

(11795 (11354 (11023 (10692 (10362 (9480 lb)
lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) *
Even and hard 23.5R25 7050 kg 6800 kg 6600 kg 6400 kg * 5700 kg * 4300 kg
(15543 (14991 (14550 (14110 (12566 (9480 lb)
lb) lb) lb) lb) * lb) * *
The maximum permissible load according o the table is reduced if the attachments are fitted with additional equip-
ment. For more information, contact your dealer who has access to the attachment catalogue.
*) Is limited by the attachment. (max. load per tine, 4300 kg (9480 lb) at a distance to centre of gravity of 600 mm
(23.6 in))
Specifications
244 Pallet forks
L120F
Pallet fork (with attachment bracket)
Order No. 93688
Tyres 23.5R25
L68186A
A
C
B
A 966 mm (3' 2.0'') C 29 mm (0' 1.1'') E 3847 mm (12' 7.5'')

B 1723 mm (5' 7.8'') D 1836 mm (6' 0.3'') F 814 mm (2' 8.0'')
Loading table for pallet fork
Rated operating load capacity (rated work load) at different load cen-
tre distances
Ground Tyres 500 mm 600 mm 700 mm 800 mm 900 mm 1200 mm

(19.7 in) (23.6 in) (27.6 in) (31.5 in) (35.4 in) (47.2 in)
Rough terrain 23.5R25 5890 kg 5670 kg 5530 kg 5360 kg 5210 kg 4300 kg

(12985 (12500 (12192 (11817 (11486 (9480 lb)
lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) *
Even and hard 23.5R25 7780 kg 7500 kg 7310 kg 6450 kg 5730 kg 4300 kg
(17152 (16535 (16116 (14220 (12632 (9480 lb)
lb) lb) lb) lb)* lb) * *
The maximum permissible load according o the table is reduced if the attachments are fitted with additional equip-
ment. For more information, contact your dealer who has access to the attachment catalogue.
*) Is limited by the attachment. (max. load per tine, 4300 kg (9480 lb) at a distance to centre of gravity of 600 mm
(23.6 in))
Specifications
Log grapples 245
Log grapples
L110F
Timber grapple (for attachment bracket)
Tyres 750/65 R25
A 2.4 m2 (2.9 yd2)
20°
45°
I
H
20° K
B
J D
E
C
L
G
M L67074A
B 3470 mm (1' 4.6'') F 1520 mm (4' 11.8'') J 2790 mm (9' 1.8'')

C 1840 mm (6' 0.4") G 2720 mm (8' 11.1'') K 2990 mm (9' 9.7'')
D 2840 mm (9' 3.8'') H 4580 mm (15' 0.3'') L 2060 mm (6' 9.1'')
E 1460 mm (4' 9.5'') I 6620 mm (24' 8.6'') M 8760 mm (28' 8.9'')
Specifications
246 Log grapples
L120F
Timber grapple (for attachment bracket)
Order No. 80832
Tyres 750/65 R25
20°
45°
I
H
20° K
B
J D
E
C
L
G
M L67074A
A 2.4 m2 (2.9 yd2)

B 3550 mm (11' 7.9'') F 1530 mm (5' 0.2'') J 2790 mm (9' 1.8'')
C 1880 mm (6' 2.0'') G 2790 mm (9' 1.8'') K 2990 mm (9' 9.7'')
D 2920 mm (9' 7.0") H 4660 mm (15' 3.5'') L 2150 mm (7' 0.6'')
E 1500 mm (4' 11.1'') I 6690 mm (21' 11.4'') M 8850 mm (29' 0.4'')
Specifications
Material handling arm 247
Material handling arm

L110F
Order No. 92008
Tyres 23.5R25
Weight 500 kg (1103 lb)
D
E
F
S
R
Q
A B
G C
H P
I
L68188A
M
N
O
J
D 2740 mm (8' 11.9'') J 1310 mm (4' 3.6'') P 1620 mm (5' 3.8'')

E 2120 mm (6' 11.5'') K 1880 mm (6' 2.0'') Q 5350 mm (17' 6.6'')
F 1500 mm (4' 11.1'') L 2450 mm (8' 0.5'') R 6310 mm (20' 8.4'')
G 3220 mm (10' 6.8'') M 1900 mm (6' 2.8'') S 7250 mm (23' 9.4'')
H 4350 mm (14' 3.3'') N 2970 mm (9' 8.9'')
I 5490 mm (18' 0.1'') O 3950 mm (12' 11.5'')
Loading table for material handling arm
Mechanical 92008
Arm extension
Retracted (A) 3300 kg (7275 lb)
Halfway extended (B) 2570 kg (5666 lb)
Fully extended (C) 2100 kg (4630 lb)
Hydraulically folding 82137
Retracted (A) 2480 kg (5467 lb)
Extended (C) 2080 kg (4586 lb)

Specifications
248 Material handling arm
L120F
Order No. 92008
Tyres 23.5R25
Weight 500 kg (1103 lb)
D
E
F
S
R
Q
A B
G C
H P
I
L68188A
M
N
O
J
D 2853 mm (9' 4.3'') J 1363 mm (4' 5.7'') P 1624 mm (5' 3.9'')

E 2209 mm (7' 3.0'') K 1907 mm (6' 3.1'') Q 5408 mm (17' 8.9'')
F 1565 mm (5' 1.6'') L 2452 mm (8' 0.5'') R 6341 mm (20' 9.6'')
G 3298 mm (10' 9.8'') M 2023 mm (6' 7.6'') S 7274 mm (23' 10.4'')
H 4432 mm (14' 6.5'') N 3017 mm (9' 10.8'')
I 5565 mm (18' 3.1'') O 4011 mm (13' 1.9'')
Loading table for material handling arm

Mechanical 92008
Arm extension Distance to load *) Without counterweight
Retracted (A) 4104 mm (13' 5.6'') 3640 kg (8025 lb)
Halfway extended (B) 5237 mm (17' 2.2'') 2830 kg (6239 lb)
Fully extended (C) 6370 mm (20' 10.8'') 2330 kg (5137 lb)
Hydraulically folding 82137
Retracted 5382 mm (17' 7.9'') 2740 kg (6041 lb)
Extended 6381 mm (20' 11.2'') 2300 kg (5071 lb)

*) From wheel centre to lifting hook
Specifications
Service journal 249
Service journal
Service 100 hours Type of service Signature and stamp
Date Hours Warranty Inspection
Date Hours Service and maintenance
Date Hours Warranty Inspection


Specifications
250 Service journal

Specifications
Service journal 251

Specifications
252
Alphabetical index
253
Alphabetical index Engine air cleaner's main filter, cleaning and changing179
Engine braking / downshifting...................................... 105
Accidents .......................................................................96 Engine braking/downshifting, electric servo
Accumulators, depressurizing ......................................202 (optional equipment) .................................................... 106
Actions before operating ..............................................100 Engine oil filters, replacing........................................... 174
Actions before transporting machine ...........................117 Engine oil ..................................................................... 216
Adjusting lift height .........................................................79 Engine oil, changing .................................................... 173
Adjusting tilting rearwards ..............................................79 Engine oil, checking..................................................... 173
Air conditioning ............................................................197 Engine protection - Software ......................................... 93
Alarm texts .....................................................................45 Engine.............................................................. 5, 173, 220
Alternator belt, checking (workshop job) ......................186 Environmental requirements............................................ 5
Alternator with air filter (optional equipment)................186 Equipment........................................................................ 7
Anti-theft system ............................................................55 Evaporator ................................................................... 198
Arrival and Delivery Inspection.....................................169 Excavating ................................................................... 139
Attachment brackets ....................................................133 Fan belt, checking (workshop job) ............................... 183
Attachments .................................................................132 Fire protection.............................................................. 162
Auto engine shut-off (optional equipment) .....................93 Fire suppression system (optional equipment) ................ 8
Automatic greasing system ..........................................204 FOPS and ROPS............................................................. 7
Automatic shifting (APS) ..............................................104 Foreword.......................................................................... 1
Axle oil, changing .........................................................191 Fuel filling point............................................................ 175
Axles ....................................................................191, 228 Fuel filter, replacing ..................................................... 176
Axles, changing breather filters....................................192 Fuel prefilter, changing (optional equipment) .............. 178
Batteries .......................................................................184 Fuel system ................................................................. 175
Batteries, charging .......................................................185 Fuel system, air bleeding............................................. 175
Batteries, maintenance ................................................184 Fuel.............................................................................. 217
Battery disconnect switch ............................................184 Function check............................................................... 67
Bearings, greasing .......................................................203 Fuses ........................................................................... 225
Before service read ......................................................160 Gear shifting ................................................................ 103
Boom kick-out and bucket positioner (Electric servo) ....79 Gravel and heap loading.............................................. 139
Boom kick-out ................................................................78 Handling hazardous materials ..................................... 164
Brake system ...................................................6, 193, 229 Headlamps, adjusting .................................................. 187
Brake test .....................................................................109 High-Lift grapple (optional equipment)......................... 145
Brakes, checking..........................................................193 High-tip bucket (optional equipment) ........................... 138
Braking .........................................................................109 Hydraulic function, 3rd and 4th .................................... 135
Breather filter, fuel system ...........................................178 Hydraulic oil level, checking......................................... 200
Bucket operation ..........................................................136 Hydraulic oil ................................................................. 200
Bucket positioner ...........................................................78 Hydraulic oil, changing................................................. 200
Bucket teeth .................................................................199 Hydraulic system ............................................. 7, 200, 236
Bucket teeth, changing ................................................199 Hydraulic system, changing breather filter................... 201
Bucket with clamping arm (optional equipment) ..........137 Hydraulic system, changing return oil filter .................. 201
Buckets ........................................................................136 Hydraulically powered, rotating attachments ............... 153
Bulb, changing .............................................................188 Identification numbers...................................................... 2
Cab ..................................................................6, 195, 234 Information and warning plates / decals ........................ 16
Cab, cleaning and changing ventilation filter ...............195 Information..................................................................... 31
CareTrack (optional equipment).......................................8 Instrument panel, cab post ............................................ 56
CE-marking, EMC-directive............................................11 Instrument panel, front................................................... 24
Change volumes ..........................................................218 Instrument panel, overhead ........................................... 65
Choosing bucket ..........................................................136 Instrument panels .......................................................... 23
Cleaning the machine ..................................................170 Intended use .................................................................... 5
Climate control system.............................................65, 86 Interval between changes............................................ 219
Combi forks (optional equipment) ................................148 Keypad for display ......................................................... 30
Combination table, interchangeable equipment Kick-down function....................................................... 105
(attachments) machine model...................................242 Kick-down function, electric servo
Communication equipment, installation .........................14 (optional equipment) .................................................... 106
Compressor belt, checking and adjusting Lashing of machine...................................................... 123
tension (workshop job) .................................................197 Levelling....................................................................... 141
Condenser ...................................................................198 Lifting objects............................................................... 154
Control panel (optional equipment) ................................67 Lifting the machine....................................................... 123
Controls..........................................................................69 Loading vehicle with timber grapples........................... 143
Coolant.................................................................181, 216 Loading ........................................................................ 151
Coolant, changing ........................................................182 Log grapples (optional equipment) ...................... 142, 245
Coolant, checking ........................................................181 Lubrication and service chart............... 169, 209, 210, 212
Cooling system ............................................................181 Lubrication grease ....................................................... 217
Delivery Instructions.....................................................169 Lubrication ................................................................... 203
Depressurizing, 3rd and 4th hydraulic function ............135 Machine operator safety ................................................ 97
Dimensions ..................................................................238 Machine, volumes........................................................ 240
Display ...........................................................................29 Manual gear shifting .................................................... 103
Dumping load ...............................................................141 Material handling arm (optional equipment) ........ 150, 247
Economical operation ..................................................125 Oil-bath air cleaner (optional equipment)..................... 180
Electrical distribution box .............................................185 Oil-bath air cleaner, changing oil ................................. 180
Electrical system ..............................................6, 184, 222 Oil-bath air cleaner, checking ...................................... 180
Engine air cleaner ........................................................179 Oil-bath air cleaner, cleaning ....................................... 180
Alphabetical index
254
Operating (working) on a public road .............................98 Turbocharger ............................................................... 101

Operating information ....................................................29 Tyre sizes and air pressures........................................ 231
Operating instructions ....................................................93 Tyres............................................................................ 194
Operating techniques ...................................................125 Underground cables and pipelines .............................. 129
Operating with a load ...................................................152 Visibility.......................................................................... 94
Operating with material handling arm ..........................151 Washer fluid reservoir.................................................. 196
Operating with pallet forks ...........................................147 Water trap .................................................................... 177
Operating with whole trunks.........................................144 Welding........................................................................ 185
Operator comfort ............................................................83 What to do if the machine gets stuck........................... 113
Operator duties ..............................................................96 Wheel bolts, check-tightening...................................... 194
Operator seat, lubrication.............................................196 Wheel nuts, tightening torques .................................... 233
Operator's seat...............................................................83 Whole-body vibrations ................................................. 126
Other controls ................................................................69 Working in the cold ...................................................... 131
Overhead power lines for high voltage ........................128 Working in water .......................................................... 131
Paint finish maintenance ..............................................170 Working on a grade ..................................................... 130
Pallet forks (optional equipment) .................................146 Working with log grapples............................................ 143
Pallet forks ...................................................................243 Working within dangerous areas ................................. 128
Parking brake, mechanical release ..............................116
Parking .........................................................................112
Positioning of transporting vehicle ...............................141
Power transmission..........................................................6
Presentation .....................................................................5
Product plates ................................................................15
Propeller shafts and back-up bearings, lubrication ......191
Radiator, cleaning ........................................................183
Rear cab wall .................................................................66
Rear vision system, screen, black/white
(optional equipment) ......................................................91
(optional equipment) ......................................................90
Recommended lubricants ............................................215
Recovering/towing .......................................................114
Relays and fuses .........................................................188
Relays ..........................................................................223
Return-to-Dig .................................................................79
Reversible fan, cleaning...............................................183
Rock loading ................................................................140
Rotating attachments ...................................................153
Running-in instructions ..................................................93
Safety regulations ............................................................1
Safety rules in case of fire..............................................99
Safety rules when operating ..........................................96
Safety when servicing ..................................................159
Seat belt .........................................................................85
Service and maintenance ............................................169
Service journal .....................................................169, 249
Service points ..............................................................172
Service position............................................................159
Service programme......................................................169
Settings ..........................................................................42
Sideshift forks (optional equipment).............................149
Signalling diagram .......................................................156
Specifications ...............................................................215
Starting engine in cold weather....................................102
Starting engine .............................................................101
Starting with booster batteries .....................................102
Steering system .......................................................6, 230
Steering........................................................................107
Stopping machine ........................................................111
Symbol key ..................................................................209
Table of contents .............................................................3
The USA Federal Clean Air Act .....................................20
Touch-up painting ........................................................170
Transmission breather filter, changing .........................190
Transmission oil level, checking...................................189
Transmission oil, changing ..........................................189
Transmission........................................................189, 227
Transmission, changing oil filter...................................190
Transmission, cleaning suction filter ............................190
Ref.No. VOE21B1003320 English
Transporting load (loading carrying) .........................140 CST
Transporting machine ..................................................117 Volvo, Eskilstuna
Travelling on public road ................................................98

Operator'S Manual: Ref - No. VOE21B1003320 English CST

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator'S Manual: Ref - No. VOE21B1003320 English CST

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Ref.No. VOE21B1003320 English

Safety regulations Operating techniques

WARNING! Service and maintenance

Get to know the capacity and limits of your Alphabetical index

Manufacturer Volvo Construction Equipment AB

Machine product identifi-

Please send any comments regarding the Operator´s Manual to om@volvo.com

Service and maintenance.....................................169

FOPS and ROPS

Anti-theft device (optional equipment)

Logged machine data

CareTrack (optional equipment)

Fire suppression system

Manual activation of the sprinkler system

Location for handheld fire extinguisher (optional

Fire extinguishing agent

EMC Regulations of the EC

Valid for Volvo Wheel Loaders

EG DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FOR MACHINES (IIA)

Volvo Construction Equipment AB, SE-631 85 ESKILSTUNA, Sweden,

Governing harmonised standards:

Authorised issuer's signature and person authorised to compile the tech-

Signature of authorised representative in the European Community with

This declaration covers attachments that have been developed, designed/

Valid for attachments in the category interchangeable equip-

EG DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FOR MACHINES (IIA)

Volvo Construction Equipment AB, SE-631 85 ESKILSTUNA, Sweden,

Governing harmonised standards:

Authorised issuer's signature and person authorised to compile the tech-

Signature of authorised representative in the European Community with

*) On page 242 there is a combination table showing attachments

Protection against electromagnetic interference

Guidelines for installing aerial (antenna)

1 Lifting frame 6 Engine + exhaust decal

1) For current machine weight, see page 240.

Information and warning plates / decals

1 WARNING! First read the Operator's Manual 2 WARNING! Rotating fan

4 WARNING! Check that the attachment is locked

11 WARNING! Hot surfaces 12 Hot coolant

Caution: System to be servised by Volvo qualified personel.

Volvo Construction Equipment 11104071

13 Hydraulic oil level 14 Refrigerant R134a 15 Hydraulic oil filling point

Volvo Construction Equipment 500 h

Volvo Construction Equipment AB 50 h

SE-631 85 ESKILSTUNA, SWEDEN

25 Maximum force on towing device  26 Lifting and lashing information 11431140

read the Operator's Manual

28 Transmission  read the Opera- 29 WARNING! Disconnect the frame 15011966

tor's Manual joint lock before operating (only

The USA Federal Clean Air Act

The following acts and the causing thereof are prohibited:

The law provides a penalty of up to $2,750 USD for each violation.

An example of a prohibited modification is the recalibration of the

You should not make a change to an EPA-certified non-road en-

Normal Non-Road Engine Use

Non-Road Engine Maintenance

In order to document that the proper regular maintenance has

Service Performed By Your Local Dealer

For regular, scheduled service or maintenance, it is advisable to

Preventive Maintenance Program

Check the condition of the fuel hoses for:

Check the condition of the fuel tank:

Valid for attachments in the category interchangeable equip-

25 Maximum force on towing device 26 Lifting and lashing information 11431140

28 Transmission read the Opera- 29 WARNING! Disconnect the frame 15011966